68P02901W95

For:rrobot
Printed on:Thu, Mar 16, 2000 05:12:35

From book:02901W95-A_Final
Document:tabs
Last saved on:Thu, Mar 16, 2000 05:12:20
Document:cover
Document:spine1
Document:spine2
Document:insidecover
Document:toc
Document:Introduction
Document:Warnings and Cautions
Document:Manual information
Document:tabs
Document:insidecover
( ...)
CATEGORY 323
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CATEGORY 423
INSTALLATION AND
CONFIGURATION
CATEGORY 523
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
CATEGORY 623
OPTIONS AND SPARES
INDEX
INDEX
CATEGORY 623
OPTIONS AND SPARES
CATEGORY 523
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
CATEGORY 423
INSTALLATION AND
CONFIGURATION
CATEGORY 323
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
Cellular Infrastructure Group
GSM-201-020
SERVICE MANUAL
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+
68P02901W95-A
GSM-201-020
SERVICE MANUAL
M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+
68P02901W95-A
SERVICE MANUAL
GSM-201-020
Service Manual
E Motorola 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998

All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.K.
15th May 98
Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

68P02901W95-A
GSM-201-020
Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the
exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any
copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document
may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license
agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use
of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products
described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are trademarks of Motorola Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Tandem, Integrity, Integrity S2, and Non-Stop-UX are trademarks of Tandem Computers
Incorporated.
X Window System, X and X11 are trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Looking Glass is a registered trademark of Visix Software Ltd.
OSF/Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation.
Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
Wingz is a trademark and INFORMIX is a registered trademark of Informix Software Ltd.
SUN, SPARC, and SPARCStation are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Computer Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Inc.
ii

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolution of Problem Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Artificial respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Burns treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do not ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toxic material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum permitted exposures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum permitted exposure ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power density measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beryllium health and safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Health issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inhalation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skin contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eye contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product life cycle implications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
iii
GSM-201-020
Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem OMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaleable OMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogue number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
18
18
18
GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to GMRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GMR Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
20
Category 323
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Introduction to M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service manual content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
Equipment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity+ diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location diagram, modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location diagram, M-Cellcity components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location diagram, M-Cellcity+ components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
Enclosure safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure labelling tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
18
18
19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency band characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
112
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity+ location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
22
iv

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
TCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCU-m contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORAC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
23
24
27
29
Duplexer and Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity RF configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity+ RF configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210
210
211
212
213
214
Chapter 3
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-M NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
31
Main control unit, micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68LC060 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICC32 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASIC (crosspoint switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional diagram of ASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional description of sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
39
39
39
310
Network interface units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NIU-m NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-m location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-HDSL-m location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module view NIU-m (M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module view NIU-HDSL-m (M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network operation support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of NIU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line interface/framing sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
311
311
312
313
313
314
315
316
317
318
318
318
319
319
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
GSM-201-020
HDSL module (M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ digital/analogue signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of M-Cellcity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
320
320
320
320
321
321
321
321
322
322
323
323
324
324
324
324
Chapter 4
Power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of PSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery pack diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
42
43
43
43
44
45
411
411
411
411
412
412
Chapter 5
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
51
52
53
53
53
54
54
54
Category 423
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1/HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
vi

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM cellular tool kit number 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
12
14
15
15
Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall mounting plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
16
16
17
17
18
Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before departure to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arrival at all sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arriving at occupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving site during installation and commissioning period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
19
19
110
110
110
111
111
Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
112
112
112
112
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1/HDSL link transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
113
Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
114
Installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation kit equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
115
115
Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposing of the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
117
117
117
117
Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flatness of walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
118
118
119
Mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling holes for the mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
120
120
121
122
123
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
vii
GSM-201-020
viii
Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cabling thermal properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
129
129
129
129
Installing power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the site main earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routeing the ac power cable to the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the cables to the ac power supply isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
130
131
132
133
133
135
Antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
136
Installing antenna cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
137
137
Antenna configurations (M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of antenna configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
139
139
E1/T1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1/HDSL link connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
140
140
Installing E1/T1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the M-Cellcity E1/T1 cable conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the M-Cellcity+ E1/T1/HDSL cable conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
141
142
143
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
144
Chapter 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1/T1/HDSL link testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
22
22
Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
24
24
Unpacking the chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
27
28

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Installing the M-Cellcity chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
210
211
212
Battery installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
213
Connecting external cables to the M-Cellcity enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the ac power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the E1/T1 link to the BIB or T43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the E1 link to the HIM-75 or HIM-120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting earth straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
216
216
217
217
219
221
221
Installing HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223
223
223
223
225
Installing the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
227
227
228
228
229
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
230
Chapter 3
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
Test equipment and test leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
34
Pre-powerup checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting the system visually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
35
Powering-up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial powering up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
37
Chapter 4
Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to decommission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
ix
GSM-201-020
Decommissioning a M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity enclosure checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity+ enclosure checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
46
47
Category 523
Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to conditions and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routine maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
11
11
Equipment access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access to a wall mounted M-Cellcity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
12
12
12

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
15
16
16
16
17
Test equipment and leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
18
18
Chapter 2
Routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
Removing the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refitting the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
22
22
23
24
25
Annual routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
26
26
26

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Chapter 3
Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

References for fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
Chapter 4
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
41
Replacing an M-Cellcity solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting the new solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
43
43
Replacing an M-Cellcity enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ removal from wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity enclosure replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
48
49
410
410
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
411
412
Category 623
Parts Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory fitted options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field fitted options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
13
14
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
xi
GSM-201-020
xii

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual

Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version
information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:
Manual
issue
Date of
issue
Remarks
23rd May 97
Original issue
15th May 98
Issue A to include M-Cellcity+
Resolution of
Problem Reports
The following Problem Reports are now resolved in this manual:
15th May 98
Problem
Report
GMR
Number
PIN 34503
N/A
Remarks
To include Tx output power in the specifications

68P02901W95-A
General information
GSM-201-020
General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be
updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it
was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software
release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of
General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended to
instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the
Motorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel
engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
WARNING
Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance
instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained
through such training.
About this
manual
The manual contains a combined general system information and technical description of
the hardware elements; maintenance procedures for field engineers or technicians to
follow; and installation and configuration information for the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+
equipment in Motorola GSM, EGSM and DCS1800 systems.
The procedures presume that operators at the Operations and Maintenance Centre
(OMC) have been able to diagnose a problem, and have despatched the engineer or
technician to the site to try and fix the problem from there.

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
General information
Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section
names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are
divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of
each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard
input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:
15th May 98
CTRL-c
Press the Control and c keys at the same time.
ALT-f
Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN
Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is

identified with the symbol on both the X terminal and
the SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation
keyboard Return key is also identified with the word
Return.

68P02901W95-A
First aid in case of electric shock
GSM-201-020
First aid in case of electric shock

Warning
WARNING
Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is
broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating
material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
Artificial
respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration.
Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration,
carry out the following:
1.
Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.
2.
If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover

the wound with a dry dressing.
3.
Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Reporting safety issues
Reporting safety issues

Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances.
Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises:
15th May 98
1.
Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.
2.
Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.
3.
Report the problem directly to GSM MCSC +44 (0)1793 430040 (telephone) and
follow up with a written report by fax +44 (0)1793 430987 (fax).
4.
Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the MCSC.

68P02901W95-A
Warnings and cautions
GSM-201-020
Warnings and cautions

Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all
manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.
Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life,
physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for
example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format

WARNING
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.
Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of
equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format

CAUTION
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing
Motorola base stations.

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
General warnings
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and
maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to
comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM
manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the
equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these
requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning
labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific
warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and
within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when
working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations
and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single
phase or 415 V ac three phase mains which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas
where the ac mains power is present must not be approached until the warnings and
cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with.
To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the mains input isolator must
be set to off and locked.
Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation
which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment
when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna
connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated
cavities or feeders.
Refer to the following standards:
S
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High

Frequnecy (10kHz to 300GHz.
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic
cables connected to data in/out connectors.
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
General warnings
GSM-201-020
Lifting
equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent
responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where
provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be
manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations
1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which
the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment.
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or
perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to
ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material
Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if:
S
Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or
a wound.
The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.
Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It
should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring
that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human
exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute
IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for
controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled
environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:
Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who
have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living
quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may
exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted
exposure ceilings.
Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by
persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by
other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas
where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled
environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the
table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.
Maximum
permitted
exposures
The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of
different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment
in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment,
1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power
density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are
described by the standard as follows:
Power density (S)

Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of
watts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square
centimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and
magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In
particular,
2
S + E + 377
377
H2
where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of
W/m 2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual
quantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
GSM-201-020
Maximum
permitted
exposure
ceilings
Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled
environments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency
expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The
maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in
mW/cm 2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these
principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended
to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels:
Uncontrolled Environment
1930MHz
Ceiling
1970MHz
Controlled Environment
1930MHz
1970MHz
1.287mW/cm 2 1.313mW/cm 2 6.433mW/cm 2 6.567mW/cm 2
If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be
assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the
frequencies at which operation will occur).
Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings.
Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating
compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and
the exclusion is not applicable.
Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in
part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this
equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna
to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and
controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and
computed above.
10

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Example
calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from
the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment?
Transmit frequency
1930MHz
Base station cabinet output power, P
+39.0 dBm (8 watts)
Antenna feeder cable loss, CL
2.0dB
Antenna input power Pin
PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0dB (5watts)
Antenna gain, G
16.4dBi (43.65)
Using the following relationship:

G + 4pr W
Pin
2
Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distance
from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows:
r+
GPin
+ 43.65 5 + 1.16m
4pW
4p 12.87
where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting from
mW/cm 2 to W/m2.
NOTE
The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the
antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation
patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances
calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.
Power density
measurements
While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and
design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will
require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for
determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice
for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave,
IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be
purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn:
Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331,
(800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this
equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given
installation complies with the applicable limits.
Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio
frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the
environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other
equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall
exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time
the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later.
Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in
determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
11
Beryllium health and safety precautions
GSM-201-020

Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in
Oxygen.
With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium
compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.
Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive
within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component
should be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released,
there exists the potential for harm.
Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms
of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the
following:
Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces
yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous
membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty
with swallowing and breathing.
Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe
shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms
is 220 days.
Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very
serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid
breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There
have been deaths in the acute stage.
Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are
mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features
support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the
degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to
10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally
susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed
persons develop this reaction.
First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from
the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with
Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty
should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.
12

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister
formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.
First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical
assistance.
Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the
mucous membranes of the eyes.
First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon
as possible.
Handling
procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at
Motorola approved repair centres.
The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective
equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide.
If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be
wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The
spatula/tool used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container
is then to be sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during
this operation.
Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed
and labelled.
Disposal
methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as
hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put
into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the
safety and environmental adviser for disposal.
Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put
into the general waste skips or incinerated.
Product life cycle

implications
Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide
(identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment).
These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding
(Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such
hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange
for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
13
General cautions
GSM-201-020
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the
equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these
cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in
damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to
comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution
labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this
manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the
equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the
equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vunerable to static discharge.
Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent,
CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by
mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards.
See Devices sensitive to static for further information.
14

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static

Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of
insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied
to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into
high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted
together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into
conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling
techniques
In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following
precautions when handling the replacement:
S
Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point
(ESP) on the equipment.
Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to
replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.
Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton
overall is preferable.
If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces
with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an
earthed surface.
Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive

devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less
susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care,
preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred
directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left
exposed on the workbench.
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
15
Motorola GSM manual set
GSM-201-020

Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the
Motorola GSM equipment.
Generic manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are
release dependent:
Category
number
Name
Catalogue
number
GSM-100-101
System Information: General
68P02901W01
GSM-100-201
Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14
GSM-100-311
Technical Description: OMC in a GSM System
GSM-100-313
Technical Description: OMC Database Schema 68P02901W34
GSM-100-320
Technical Description: BSS Feature

Implementation
68P02901W36
GSM-100-321
Technical Description: BSS Command

Reference
68P02901W23
GSM-100-403
Installation & Configuration: GSM System

Configuration
68P02901W17
GSM-100-423
Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization
68P02901W43
GSM-100-501
Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC
68P02901W26
GSM-100-521
Maintenance Information: Device State

Transitions
68P02901W57
GSM-100-523
Maintenance Information: BSS Field

Troubleshooting
68P02901W51
GSM-100-503
Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics

Application
68P02901W56
GSM-100-721
Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR
68P02901W72
68P02901W31
Tandem OMC
The following Tandem OMC manuals are part of the GSM manual set for systems
deploying Tandem S300 and 1475:
Category
number
16
Name
Catalogue
number
GSM-100-202
Operating Information: OMC System

Administration
68P02901W13
GSM-100-712
Software Release Notes: OMC System
68P02901W71

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
Scaleable OMC
The following Scaleable OMC manuals replace the equivalent Tandem OMC manuals in
the GSM manual set:
Category
number
Name
Catalogue
number
GSM-100-202
Operating Information: Scaleable OMC System 68P02901W19

Administration
GSM-100-413
Installation & Configuration: Scaleable OMC

Clean Install
68P02901W47
GSM-100-712
Software Release Notes: Scaleable OMC

System
68P02901W74
Related manuals
The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:
Category
number
Name
Catalogue
number
GSM-001-103
System Information: BSS Equipment Planning
68P02900W21
GSM-002-103
System Information: DataGen
68P02900W22
GSM-005-103
System Information: Advance Operational

Impact
68P02900W25
GSM-008-403
Installation & Configuration: Expert Adviser
68P02900W36
Service manuals
The following are the service manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are not
release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may
vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered
using the overall catalogue number shown below:
Category
number
15th May 98
Name
Catalogue
number
GSM-100-020
Service Manual: BTS
68P02901W37
GSM-100-030
Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR
68P02901W38
GSM-105-020
Service Manual: M-Cell2
68P02901W75
GSM-106-020
Service Manual: M-Cell6
68P02901W85
GSM-201-020
Service Manual: M-Cellcity
68P02901W95
GSM-101-SERIES
ExCell4 Documentation Set
68P02900W50
GSM-103-SERIES
ExCell6 Documentation Set
68P02900W70
GSM-102-SERIES
TopCell Documentation Set
68P02901W80
GSM-200-SERIES
M-Cellmicro Documentation Set
68P02901W90

68P02901W95-A
17
GSM-201-020
Category number
The category number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example,
manuals with the category number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.
Catalogue
number
The Motorola 68P catalogue number is used to order manuals.
Ordering
manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or
Representative. Manuals are ordered using the catalogue number. Remember, specify
the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter.
18

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
GMR amendment
GMR amendment
Introduction to
GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual
using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals
as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR
is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue.
GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the
front.
GMR Procedure
When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manual
that previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator or
Motorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in this
manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet(s).
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
19
GMR amendment record
GSM-201-020
GMR amendment record

Instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in to
record the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet(s) that accompany each GMR and
insert them at the back of this manual for future reference.
Amendment
record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number
Incorporated by (signature)
Date
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
20

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2
RF MODULES
CHAPTER 3
DIGITAL MODULES
CHAPTER 4
POWER SUPPLY MODULES
CHAPTER 5
HEAT MANAGEMENT
CHAPTER 5
HEAT MANAGEMENT
CHAPTER 4
POWER SUPPLY MODULES
CHAPTER 3
DIGITAL MODULES
CHAPTER 2
RF MODULES
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Category 323
Technical Description
15th May 98
Technical Description: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Category 323
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1

11
11
Inroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
13
14
15
16
17

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
18
18
19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
112
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
22
TCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCU-m contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORAC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
23
24
27
29

Modules diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210
210
211
212
213
214
Chapter 3
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-M NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
31
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68LC060 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICC32 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-m NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of NIU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
39
39
39
310
311
311
311
312
313
313
314
315
316
317
318
318
318
319
319
320
320
320
320
321
321
321
321
322
322
323
323
324
324
324
324
Chapter 4

41
41
41
42

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323

Overview of PSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
43
43
44
45
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
411
411
411
412
412
Chapter 5
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
51
52
53
53
53
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
54
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
vi

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
Chapter 1
Introduction to M-Cellcity and

M-Cellcity+
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Chapter 1

11
11
Inroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
13
14
15
16
17

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
18
18
19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
112
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Overview of M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+
Overview of M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Service
manual
content
The service manual set comprises the four categories listed below:
S
Category 323.
This category provides an introduction to, a specification for, and a technical
description of the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ BTS.
Category 423.
This category provides the information to install and commission the M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+ BTS.
Category 523.
This category provides the information to maintain and repair the M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+ BTS.
Category 623.
This category provides the range of options and spares for the M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+ BTS.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
11
Equipment overview
GSM-201-323
Equipment overview
Inroduction
The M-Cellcity is a two carrier microcellular base transceiver station (BTS) which
operates in frequency bands that adopt the GSM standard (GSM900 and DCS1800). The
M-Cellcity+ adds High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) modems, and air combining
providing an improved RF output power.
The M-Cellcity+ HDSL is an alternative to Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
which uses an E1 2 Mbit/s link. HDSL operates over existing, or newly deployed,
inexpensive voice grade telephone twisted copper pair wire, where unlike E1 leased
lines, there are often no monthly rental charges.
The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ can be deployed in or out of doors and can be operated
over a wide temperature range.
The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ are designed for wall or pole mounting. A mounting
bracket is provided, and once this is in place, the complete M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ can
easily be installed onto the bracket. The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ are provided with a
moulded solar cover which, when removed, allows access for maintenance purposes.
A clearance of 0.5 metres is required around an M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ to allow for
installation, commissioning and maintenance.
All input and output interconnections (for example, ac power, antenna, E1/T1/HDSL
lines) are via the underside of the enclosure.
12

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Equipment overview
M-Cellcity
diagram
The following diagram shows a general view of an M-Cellcity:
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
13
Equipment overview
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity+
diagram
The following diagram shows a general view of an M-Cellcity+:
14

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Equipment overview
Location
diagram,
modules
The following diagram shows the location of the various modules with both M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+:
TCU-m MODULE
(1st CARRIER)
TCU-m MODULE
(2nd CARRIER)
AC-DC POWER
SUPPLY MODULE
MCU-m
DC-DC POWER
SUPPLY MODULE
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
15
Equipment overview
GSM-201-323
Location
diagram,
M-Cellcity
components
The following diagrams show the location of M-Cellcity components and connectors:
Front view
COMBINER
DC/DC PSM
AC/DC PSM
HEATER MAT
DUPLEXER
NIU-m MODULE
Underside view
T43 OR BIB MODULE ONLY

(T43 shown)
16

68P02901W97-A
BATTERY PACK
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Equipment overview
Location
diagram,
M-Cellcity+
components
The following diagrams show the location of M-Cellcity+ components and connectors:
Front view
OPTIONAL
HDSL
MODULES
DC/DC PSM
AC/DC PSM
HEATER MAT
NIU-m MODULE
OR
NIU-HDSL-m MODULE
DUPLEXERS
Underside view
HIM-120 or HIM-75 MODULE

(HIDDEN BEHIND DUPLEXER)
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
BATTERY PACK
17
Enclosure safety labels
GSM-201-323

Overview
The following diagrams and tables show the location of the warning, advisory and
specific labels applied to the equipment enclosure.
Enclosure
labelling
The following shows the location of labels on the enclosure:
Outside labelling
18

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Underside labelling
NOTE
The above diagram shows the location of the rating and safety labels on the
underside of the M-Cellcity. The rating label on the M-Cellcity+ is located in the
same position, whilst the safety label is located on the underside of the bottom
duplexer cover in the same area as the M-Cellcity.
Enclosure
labelling tables
The following explains the numbers on the enclosure labelling diagrams:
Description
Key
Part number
Comments
5486174E01
On lower right corner of

MCU-m cover panel
Outside
1
Warning label
Underside
Rating label GSM900 (M-Cellcity)

DCS1800 (M-Cellcity)
GSM900 (M-Cellcity+)
DCS1800 (M-Cellcity+)
5404850N01
5404850N02
5404850N03
5404850N04
On underside of chassis
Safety label
5404555N01
On bottom cover
5404833D01
On battery
Inside (not shown)

4
15th May 98
Battery

68P02901W97-A
19
Specifications
GSM-201-323
Specifications
Overview
The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ specifications, including frequency band characteristics,
are tabulated in this section.
Environment
The environmental limits are shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Environmental limits
Environment
Temperature
Humidity
Operating
40 _C to +50 _C
5% to 100%
Storage (packaged)
45 _C to +70 _C
8% to 100%
Dimensions
The dimensions, including the wall mounting bracket, are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Dimensions
Height M-Cellcity
Height M-Cellcity+
Width
Depth
720 mm
733 mm
504 mm
200 mm
Weights
The weight figures are shown in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Dimensions
Weight (not including wall bracket)
Weight (including wall bracket and

solar cover)
M-Cellcity
M-Cellcity+
M-Cellcity
M-Cellcity +
30 kg
32 kg
36 kg
38 kg
Power
requirements
The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ operate from a single phase ac supply. Table 1-4 shows
the power requirements.
Table 1-4 Power requirements
110
Supply voltage range
Maximum supply current range
88 V to 264 V ac
10.2 A to 1.2 A (dependent upon supply

voltage)

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Specifications
Power
consumption
Table 1-5 shows the nominal and maximum ac power consumption figures for both the
GSM900 and DCS1800 M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ enclosures.
Table 1-5 Power consumption
Ambient temperature
Nominal power
consumption
Maximum power
consumption
40 C to 10 C
10 C to +50 C
830 W
250 W
902 W
322 W
Tx output power
Table 1-6 shows the output power of the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ TCU-m modules.
Table 1-6 Tx output power (W)
Enclosure
GSM900
DCS1800
M-Cellcity
1.2
M-Cellcity+
2.5
NOTE
The M-Cellcity+ doubling of Tx output power is achieved by there being no
combining, ie the M-Cellcity+ has separate outputs for the two radios.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
111
Specifications
GSM-201-323
Frequency band
characteristics
BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the
characteristics listed in Table 1-7:
Table 1-7 Frequency band characteristics
112
GSM
EGSM
DCS1800
Transmit frequency band (MHz)
935 to 960
925 to 960
1805 to 1880
Receive frequency band (MHz)
890 to 915
880 to 915
1710 to 1785
Transmit/receive duplex
separation (MHz)
45
45
95
Channel width (kHz)
200
200
200
Number of channels
124
174
374
Transmit frequency guard bands

(MHz)
935.0 to
935.1
959.9 to
960.0
925.0 to
925.1
959.9 to
960.0
1805.0 to
1805.1
1879.9 to
1880.0
Receive frequency guard bands

(MHz)
890.0 to
890.1
914.9 to
915.0
880.0 to
880.1
914.9 to
915.0
1710.0 to
1710.1
1784.9 to
1785.0
Transmit channel centre frequency

(MHz)
Even 10ths
of a MHz
from 935.2 to
959.8
Even 10ths
of a MHz
from 925.2 to
959.8
Even 10ths of a
MHz from
1805.2 to
1879.8
Receive channel centre frequency

(MHz)
Even 10ths
of a MHz
from 890.2 to
914.8
Even 10ths
of a MHz
from 880.2 to
914.8
Even 10ths of a
MHz from
1710.2 to
1784.8

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
Chapter 2
RF modules
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
22
TCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCU-m contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORAC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
23
24
27
29

Modules diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210
210
211
212
213
214
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Overview of RF modules
RF modules
The RF modules consist of:
S
Transceiver Control Unit, micro (TCU-m).
One duplexer (M-Cellcity) or two duplexers (M-Cellcity+).
Combiner (M-Cellcity).
M-Cellcity
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the M-Cellcity RF modules:
TCU-m MODULE (1st CARRIER)

[FITTED TO REAR OF CHASSIS]
TCU-m MODULE
(2nd CARRIER)
COMBINER
DUPLEXER
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
21
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity+
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the M-Cellcity+ RF modules:
TCU-m MODULE (1st CARRIER)
[FITTED TO REAR OF CHASSIS]
TCU-m MODULE
(2nd CARRIER)
DUPLEXERS
22

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
TCU-m
TCU-m
TCU-m contents
The TCU-m consist of:
Olympus Radio Architecture Controller (ORAC) module.
Transmitter/Receiver (TRX) module.
Location diagram
The following shows the location of the TCU-m modules:
TCU-m MODULE
(1st CARRIER)
TCU-m MODULE
(2nd CARRIER)
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
23
TCU-m
GSM-201-323
ORAC module
The ORAC module is a single board designed to support a single, dual-rate basic GSM
RF carrier.
Functional blocks
ORAC consists of the following logical blocks:
S
RSS processor.
The Radio Subsystem is a collection of application processes whose purpose is to
manage the BSS RF hardware to the mobile stations. The RSS functions include
the Layer 2 interface (LAPD) and radio link control including the handover
detection and power control process.
The RSS portion of the BSS implements the interconnection between the
application layer (Layer 3) and the physical channel hardware (layer 1). The RSS
is resident on the ORAC and supports a single transceiver.
The RSS is comprised of four main components:
Layer 1 Interface.
Layer 2 Protocol.
RSS Abis Interface.
Handover Detection and Power Control
RSS memory.
DRAM comprises two banks, parity protected. The DRAM stores the code for
execution within the RSS processor section and all other processes on the ORAC
module.
Fast Flash 1 Mb of Fast Flash (75 ns) used for the boot code and executive.
Slow Flash 1 Mb of Slow Flash used for SWFM alarms.
NVRAM 512 kb of NVRAM used for electronic ID/cabinet address.
OSCAR processor.
The OSCAR processor performs the control functions for the OSCAR to RSS
interface, Channel Codec control, TTY link and PA control.
Equalizer.
The equalizer performs channel equalisation for a single RF carrier.
Channel Codec.
The channel coders perform:
Channel coding/decoding
Interleaving/de-interleaving
Speech transcoding
24

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
TCU-m
Interface Transceiver Control (ITC)

The ITC performs low level management of the TRX:
A/D Conversion
Modulation/Demodulation Control
Tx Power Control
Synthesizer Interface
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)

Slow serial interface for TTY and control
Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI)

Fast serial interface for communication between DSPs
These are shown in the following diagram. The block diagram representation of the
ORAC board showing lines which represent the interfaces between the main processing
sections of the module. The reader should note that the Channel Codec blocks and
equalizer block contain multiple processors.
TTY/SCI
Each processor has a TTY port available; for example the RSS, OSCAR, Channel
Codecs and Equalizer.
All SCI ports from all processors are available for bootstrap/test.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
25
TCU-m
GSM-201-323
Functional block diagram of ORAC

The following diagram shows a functional block diagram of the ORAC module:
CHANNEL
CODECS
PRIVATE BUS
SCI
SSI
SCI
MMI TTY
EQUALIZER
SCI (MMI) ROUTEING

INTERFACE
UPLINK
BUS
SCI
RSS
PROCESSOR
AND
MEMORY
DATA
OSCAR
PROCESSOR
ITC ASIC
CONTROL
TRX MODULE
PERIPHERAL
BUS
2 MBit/s HDLC DATA

TRAFFIC SSI LINK
26

68P02901W97-A
TDM
INTERFACE
2 MBit/s
DATA
To MCU
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
TCU-m
TRX module
The TRX module supports a single RF carrier and can operate in both the primary and
extended GSM frequency bands.
The TRX module does not support frequency hopping, dynamic power control or receive
spatial diversity.
A maximum of two TRX modules can be supported.
Receiver subsystem
The receiver (Rx) signal is fed from the duplexer to a low noise amplifier; the amplified
signal is then passed to a switch matrix which splits off the Rx signal for the (daisy chain)
2nd TRX module.
The signal is then filtered to remove out-of-band signals, down converted to an IF of
86.6 MHz, then passed through various stages of AGC, filtering and amplification, before
being processed into I & Q channels at a second IF of 173.2 MHz.
Finally the I & Q channel data is processed, converted to digital and sent to the ORAC
module.
Functional block diagram of receiver

1st LO
Daisy Chain port
LNA
Duplexer
Switch
Matrix
Duplexer
RF Filter
Mixer 1
XTAL Filter
AGC7 0/45 dB
Switch
90_
AGC06
060 dB
Baseband
Processing
I & Q Demod
Limiting O/P
Cal
AGC
015 dB
2nd LO
XTAL
Filter
15th May 98
SSI O/P

68P02901W97-A
27
TCU-m
GSM-201-323
Transmitter subsystem
The transmitter (Tx) receives digital baseband information from the ORAC module and
converts it into a GMSK signal at 7 MHz. This GMSK signal is then up-converted to the
first IF of 175 MHz, passed through an amplification and filtering stage to remove
unwanted information (due to mixing of signals), then further amplified and passed
through the second mixer stage to reach the final transmit frequency of 925 960 MHz.
Finally the signal is passed through a number of further stages which include filtering,
amplification/attenuation and temperature compensation to ensure the signal is
transmitted at its optimum power level.
Functional block diagram of transmitter

TXIFLO 182 MHz
Clock
passive
LPF
GMSK
MDATA
Gilbert Cell
(VCA)
175
MHz
7MHz
SAW
BPF
FL2
SAW
BPF
gain block
gain block
Enable
Digital ramping control
175MHz
Digital control signal

Voltage
Variable
Amplifier Attenuator
Amplifier
925..960MHz
Amplifier
RF output
BPF
BPF
TXRFLO
(750..785MHz)
DSA
VVA
Digital Step
Attenuator
PWR DET
TX_KEY
Power Control
28

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
TCU-m
Synthesizer
S
The synthesizer blocks are collocated with the Rx or Tx circuits and used for the
RF and IF frequency synthesis.
Alarm signal of synthesizer origin are:
TX synthesizer lock alarm.
RX synthesizer lock alarm.
13 MHz synthesizer lock.
Functional block diagram of synthesizer

86.6 MHz
Rx 2nd
2.048 MHz
793.6 828.2 MHz
Rx Main
13 MHz
Tx Main
Reference to ORAC
Reference to Tx section
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
750.2 784.8 MHz
29
Duplexer and Combiner
GSM-201-323

Overview of
modules
The duplexer switches Tx and Rx signals between a single antenna and the appropriate
TCU-m.
The TX combiner is used to combine the two Transmit signal outputs onto the duplexer
and hence to one antenna. The combiner is only fitted in the M-Cellcity.
M-Cellcity
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the duplexer and combiner modules:
COMBINER
DUPLEXER
210

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity+
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the duplexer modules:
DUPLEXERS
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
211
GSM-201-323
Modules diagram
The following illustrations show the duplexer and combiner modules:
DUPLEXER
(M-Cellcity AND M-Cellcity +)
COMBINER
(M-Cellcity ONLY)
DUPLEXER AND HOLDER

(M-Cellcity + ONLY)
212

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity RF
configuration
The following shows the TRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a M-Cellcity dual carrier system:
TRX 1
COMBINER
3004504D01
Tx
Tx OUT (PL6)
3004504D01
Tx
CARRY IN/OUT
Tx
Rx IN
Tx/Rx ANTENNA
(PL5)
Part of 3004741N02
(power cable)
3004438D01
TRX 0
DUPLEXER
Tx OUT (PL6)
Tx
Ae
CARRY IN/OUT
Part of 3004512D01
Rx
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
Rx IN
(PL5)
213
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity+ RF
configuration
The following shows the TRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a M-Cellcity+ dual carrier
system:
Tx ANTENNA
TRX 1
DUPLEXER
3086005E05/A
Tx OUT (PL6)
Tx
CARRY IN/OUT
Ae
SLAVE
Part of 3004741N02
(power cable)
Tx/Rx ANTENNA
TRX 0
DUPLEXER
3086005E08/A
Tx
Tx OUT (PL6)
Ae
CARRY IN/OUT
Part of 3004512D01
Rx
Rx IN
(PL5)
MASTER
214

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
Chapter 3
Digital modules
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Chapter 3
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU-M NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
31

MCU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68LC060 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICC32 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
39
39
39
310

NIU-m NIU-HDSL-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of NIU-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDSL interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
311
311
312
313
313
314
315
316
317
318
318
318
319
319

Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
320
320
320
320

HIM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
321
321
321
321
322
322

323
323
GPS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
324
324
324
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Overview of digital modules
Overview of digital modules

MCU-m
The main site control functions for an M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ BTS site are
accommodated in the MCU-m. It provides a processing platform for the site control
software; the main software functions being:
S
Call processing (CP).
Cell resource manager (CRM).
Radio resource state machine (RRSM).
Switching.
Support of two TCU-m connection is made to ORAC.
The maximum number of carriers is limited to two and the MCU-m is designed to drive
both carrier units directly. The MCU-m is customized to drive two ORACs over ribbon
cables from one connector.
NIU-M
NIU-HDSL-m
Two micro networks interface units are available:
15th May 98
NIU-m is fitted to the M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ to provide E1 or T1 communication

links.
NIU-HDSL-m is fitted only to the M-Cellcity+ in order to provide E1 or HDSL

communication links.

68P02901W97-A
31
Main control unit, micro
GSM-201-323

MCU-m
The main control unit, micro (MCU-m) module provides the following functions:
S
Control processing.
Crosspoint switch.
BTS master clock synchronization.
Timing.
The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management, together with
BTS call processing (RRSM and CRM).
The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and up to two TCU-m
modules.
Location diagram
The following shows the location of an MCU-m:
MCU-m MODULE
MOUNTED ON REAR
OF HEATSINK
32

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Block diagram of
MCU-m
The following shows a block diagram of the MCU-m module:
SIGNAL CONNECTOR
WARM
RESET AND
RESET
SWITCHES
WARM RESET
(FROM NIU-m)
RESET
XTAL
PLL
TTY
INTERFACE
2
CONTROL
BTP
(68LC060)
DATA
RED LED
RS232
COMMS
PROCESSOR
(QUICC32)
ADDRESS
GREEN LED
MMI
GPS
EXTERNAL
SITE ID
BERR
ECC
PCMCIA
INTERFACE
16Mb
DRAM
PCMCIA
FAST FLASH
(BOOTCODE &
EXECUTIVE)
SLOW FLASH
(SWFM)
NIU
4
TCU
CROSSPOINT
SWITCH
SYNC
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GPS 1PPS
6
EXTERNAL
CLOCK
33
GSM-201-323
Processor
functionality
The MCU-m processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companion mode with
a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration and peripheral
functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for the TCU BCF links.
The main processing section of the MCU-m currently supports 16 Mbytes of RAM.
The DRAM system implements an ECC system for high data integrity.
The boot up code is stored in a 1 Mbyte flash EPROM, a further 0.5 Mbytes of flash
EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage.
A Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) is supported via a PCMCIA interface. This
allows flash memory cards of various sizes to be fitted.
68LC060
Processor
The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of 25 MHz (the
reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companion mode).
The on-board memory management unit (MMU) provides write protection of memory
areas, particularly program storage areas.
QUICC32
Processor
The QUICC32 processor is a pin compatible derivative of the 68360. There are minor
hardware changes and microcode changes which permit the Serial Communications
Channel (SCCI) to operate as a 32 channel HDLC controller, utilizing the CPM RISC
controller to perform the processing.
The QUICC32 processor operates at 25 MHz. This also defines the external bus speed
of the 68LC060 processor.
The on-board system integration features of the QUICC32 provide DRAM control and
other peripheral control functions to support the 68LC060 processor.
PCMCIA
The loading and storage of software is done via the PCMCIA interface.
The PCMCIA socket is an industry standard 68 pin single socket accessible from the
MCU-m side panel and is fitted with an ejector. The card is permanently installed.
The PCMCIA interface is controlled using a Cirrus Logic PC card socket controller. The
PCMCIA interface is provided to support rev 2.1 type I and II cards.
34

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
ASIC (crosspoint
switch)
This application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) provides central switching capabilities
for the MCU-m. It is capable of supporting up to two TCU-m, together with up to two
network interfaces and two links to the processing section, and one link to the sync
processor.
The ASIC also provides link interface features associated with the TCU-m links, these
include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the TCU-m, and the
necessary framing and encoding to support the link.
All of the serial links into the ASIC are E1/T1, 125 ms frame, 32 eight bit timeslots per
frame.
Functional
diagram of ASIC
The following diagram shows the links between the ASIC and other processor elements.
TO MAIN PROCESSOR
To TCUs via RIBBON CABLE

4
CROSSPOINT
SWITCH
TO NETWORK INTERFACES
2
TO SYNC PROCESSOR
PARALLEL PROCESSOR BUS

E1/T1 TDM SERIAL STREAM
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
35
GSM-201-323
ASIC/TCU links
The ASIC interfaces to a maximum of two TCU-m links. The ASIC can switch any
timeslot on any of the TCU-m links to any timeslot on any of the other links connected to
it for example TCU-m links, network links or processor links.
The TCU-m links are all Manchester coded/decoded by the ASIC. This function can be
switched on or off on a per link basis. The default condition is with Manchester coding
enabled. The disable feature is for applications outside of the MCU-m module.
The ASIC provides the following functions:
S
Distance measurement.
Delay compensation.
Timing reference insertion.
Manchester coding/decoding.
Delay compensation
The ASICl continually measures the round trip delay on each TCU-m link. This delay is
used by the ASIC to calculate a timing advance for each link.
ASIC synchronization
The ASIC receives timing pulses from the sync section and inserts the appropriate bits
into the TCU-m downlink synchronization and framing timeslots. The sync circuit
provides a version of the 6.12 s and 60 ms signals that are advanced by 125 ms for this
purpose.
ASIC / network links

The ASIC supports the two network connections from the NIU-m. The data to/from these
links can be switched to/from any timeslot on any of the other links connected to it, such
as the TCU-m links, network links or processor links.
ASIC / processor links

The ASIC supports three processor links. Two are connected to the main processor, and
one to the sync processor. The data to/from these links can be switched to/from any
timeslot on any of the other links connected to it, such as the TCU-m links, network links
or processor links.
The link to the sync processor utilizes a single 64 kbit/s HDLC timeslot.
The two links to the main processor allow it to route HDLC and other links to the
appropriate place:
36
24 HDLC timeslots for the BCF RSS channel to each TCU-m (only two used).
Four timeslots for NIU-m control channels (only two used).
Two channels for RSL links.

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
ASIC processor parallel interface

The ASIC processor parallel interface allows control and monitoring of all ASIC functions
as listed:
S
TCU-m link timeslot allocation.
Switch connection memory programming.
Switch data memory access.
Enable TCU-m link Manchester coding/decoding.
Reading of TCU-m link delay measurement results.
The parallel interface also provides information on fault conditions as follows:

S
TCU sync loss.
TCU link delay compensation invalid.
Sync loss.
Sync block
The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates all required
local references from a high stability local clock source. This clock source may also be
locked to the incoming network clocks.
The sync function is controlled by the main processing section via a parallel port.
Functional
description of
sync
The clock select block receives all of the possible sources of reference signal:
S
Extracted clock from the NIU-m.
A reference signal from the MCU-m.
The GPS one-pulse-per-second reference (future feature).
One of the sources is selected as a reference and up to two others can be monitored and
prioritized as backup references, should the primary reference fail.
The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. It includes an
OCXO accurate to 0.05 ppm, a phase comparator and a loop filter. The PLL has the
following operating modes:
S
Warmup
The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, but the OCXO is not yet
warmed up.
Set frequency
The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, and the OCXO is
warmed up.
Fast tune
Closed loop with wide filter for coarse locking (extracted from network clock/GPS).
Fine tune
Closed loop with narrow filter for accurate locking (extracted from network
clock/GPS).
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
37
GSM-201-323
The sync block provides the following reference clocks:

S
16.384 MHz
125 ms
60 ms
6.12 s
Code loading
The sync controller has an E1/T1 serial link into the MCU-m ASIC enabling a 64 kbit/s
HDLC channel to be used for code loading.
This link cannot be used for any other function, thus ensuring that the sync block can be
migrated to an ASIC in the future.
The sync block comprises 256 k of Flash EPROM used to store:
S
Factory bootstrap code.
Operational code.
The factory bootstrap code cannot be altered. Its function is to establish an HDLC link to
the MCU-m ASIC, so that a query can be raised on the current version of the stored
operational code.
If the stored operational code is the correct version, the factory bootstrap code moves
the operational code to RAM and executes the code.
If the query results in the need for new operational code, the MCU-m downloads the
code, via the MCU-m ASIC, to the RAM in the sync block.
After a successful download, the factory bootstrap code programmes the flash EPROM
with the new operational code and then starts running the operational code in RAM.
38

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Sync control
The sync block is controlled via the parallel interface to the main processor section. The
main processor controls the following functions of the sync block:
S
Selection of loop mode. The sync circuit automatically changes mode, but it is
possible for the main processor to override this.
Selection of loop reference source.
Phase detector mode selection.
Reading and preloading of reference counter values.
Reading of GSM frame number counter.
Reading/loading GSM superframe number counter.
Definition of divisor for extracted clocks.
Real time clock reading/loading, and definition of tick source.
Selection of re-sync strobe source.
Setting of lock duration time.
The sync circuit interrupts the main processor (if enabled) on the following events:
S
Changes in loop operating mode.
Loss of selected reference source.
When a new calibration value is available for the long term average calculation.
Every 1 second pulse from the GPS receiver.
Sync circuit watchdog timeouts.
Illegal phase detector settings.
All interrupts can be enabled/disabled.
MMI interface
The main processing section is provided with a TTY interface to the QUICC32. This
interface does not support hardware handshaking. The serial ports supports a minimum
of 9.6 kbit/s, which may be increased depending upon the load on the QUICC32.
GPS interface
The GPS interface to the processor section is an RS232 compatible port. This is
additional to the MMI TTY ports. The 1PPS signal is on the same connector, at V. 28
levels. This signal is fed to the sync block.
Electronic board
ID
Electronic board ID is supported by the slow flash memory (the non-volatile data bank).
This storage contains the following information:
15th May 98
MCU-m module serial number 16 bytes.
Kit number 16 bytes.
Description 32 bytes.

68P02901W97-A
39
GSM-201-323
Electronic site ID
A programmable site ID feature is provided using a serial EPROM. This is provisioned
on the dc-dc power supply module (PSM).
310

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Network interface units

NIU-m
NIU-HDSL-m
Two micro network interface units are available, the NIU-m and the NIU-HDSL-m:
S
The network interface unit micro (NIU-m) module provide the functionality required
to connect up (terminate) the network, enabling E1 or T1 communication links.
The network interface unit high bit rate digital subscriber line micro (NIU-HDSL-m)
module (M-Cellcity+ only) with two high bit rate subscriber line (HDSL) modules,
provides the functionality required to connect up (terminate) the network, enabling
E1 and HDSL communication links.
This function is separated from the MCU-m due to the wide variety of interfaces that can
be provided.
The MCU-m controls the NIU-m (or NIU-HDSL-m) provision of network interface
configuration and supervision.
Location of modules
The NIU-m module (M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+) or NIU-HDSL-m module (M-Cellcity+ only)
is fitted to the right of the internal duplexer within the chassis.
NIU-m location
diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the NIU-m module:
NIU-m MODULE
(MCU-m OMITTED
FOR CLARITY)
INTERNAL
DUPLEXER
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
311
GSM-201-323
NIU-HDSL-m
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the NIU-HDSL-m module:
HDSL
MODULES
INTERNAL
DUPLEXER
(MCU-m OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
312
NIU-HDSL-m MODULE

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Module view
NIU-m (M-Cellcity
and M-Cellcity+)
The following diagram shows the NIU-m module:
POWER
CONNECTOR
ALARM & DATA

CONNECTOR
NIU-m RESET
BUTTON
GREEN LED
RED LED
MCU-m RESET
BUTTON
Module view
NIU-HDSL-m
(M-Cellcity+)
The following diagram shows the NIU-HDSL-m module:
POWER
CONNECTOR
ALARM & DATA

CONNECTOR
NIU-HDSL-m
RESET
BUTTON
RED LED
HDSL
CONNECTORS
GREEN LED
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
313
GSM-201-323
Network
operation
support
Three network options are available E1, T1 or E1, HDSL:
S
The NIU-m supports the network operation of any two links, selected under
software control from the MCU-m, from either two E1 links or two T1 links.
NOTE
The E1 or T1 links are factory fitted options. Either the E1 or T1 links must be
specified by the customer.
The NIU-HDSL-m (M-Cellcity+ only) supports the network operation of any two
links, selected under software control from the MCU-m, from two E1 links or two
HDSL links.
In addition, support for the link access procedure D channel (LAPD) signalling links is
provided.
A local microprocessor is provided for network interface configuration and supervision.
This is controlled by the MCU-m and communicates with the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m
microprocessor.
314

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Diagram of
NIU-m
The following diagram identifies the functional blocks in the NIU-m:
BOARD CONNECTORS
J3
MCU-m RESET
SWITCH
RXD
TXD
GND
RS232
NIU-m RESET
SWITCH
J6
RESET
BDM
RED LED
CONTROL
PROCESSOR
GREEN LED
J7
SYNCH TTY
DATA
RAM
XTAL
ADDRESS
FLASH EEPROM
2.048Mbit/s
STROBE
J4
MAIN
LINK 0
MUX
DEMUX
LINK 1
STOP
COUNTER
START
DISTANCE
MEASURING,
PATTERN
INSERT AND
DETECT
FRAMER
LIU
NETWORK
LINK 0
PMCSIERRA
REF 6.12s
REF 125ms
2.048 Mbit/s
PMCSIERRA
FRAMER
LIU
NETWORK
LINK 1
PROCESSOR BUS
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
315
GSM-201-323
Diagram of
NIU-HDSL-m
The following diagram identifies the functional blocks in the NIU-HDSL-m:
BOARD CONNECTORS
XTAL
NIU-HDSL-m
RESET
SWITCH
J6
RESET
BDM
RED LED
CONTROL
PROCESSOR
GREEN LED
DATA
J2
RAM
J4
ADDRESS
HDSL
LINK 0
MMI RXD
MMI TXD
GND
RS232
FLASH EEPROM
J7
J4
CONTROL
HDSL
MODULE
STROBE
DATA/CLK
DUART
J8
CONTROL
DATA/CLK
HDSL
MODULE
J4
HDSL
LINK 1
FRAMER
NETWORK
LINK 0
MMI RXD
MMI TXD
GND
2.048 MBIT/S
MUX
DEMUX
LINK 1
DISTANCE
MEASURING,
PATTERN
INSERT AND
DETECT
LIU
FRAMER
STOP
MAIN
LINK 0
REF_6.12S
REF_125mS
2.048 MBIT/S
COUNTER
START
NETWORK
LINK 1
LIU
PROCESSOR BUS
BOARD CONNECTORS
NOTE
The E1 and HDSL communication links use the same connector.
316

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Processing
section
The processing section comprises a MC68360 microprocessor with 512 kbytes RAM
and 128 kbytes flash EPROM. The processor communicates with the MCU-m over TS0
(Timeslot 0) of the HDLC link.
Processor
The processing section utilizes the 68360 processor. This microprocessor provides
integrated features such that it requires little peripheral support.
Flash EPROM
The flash EPROM stores the following:
S
Factory boot.
Boot code.
Operational code storage.
Electronic ID.
The factory boot code, as the name suggests, is used during manufacture and testing of
the NIU-m and NIU-HDSL-m.
The boot code is used to initialize the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m to establish the
communication link to the MCU-m for code loading. After successful initialization, the
NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m will stop executing code from the flash EEPROM and start
executing code from the RAM.
RAM
512 kbyte of RAM is used to execute code during normal operations. It is responsible for
the LAPD coding of the radio signalling link, distance measuring and clock extraction.
Electronic ID
The electronic board ID stores the following information:
S
Board serial number 16 bytes.
Board kit number 16 bytes.
TTY Port
The TTY port (J3) NIU-m or (J2) NIU-HDSL-m allows local debugging.
LED status
The NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m status is indicated by two LEDs, as follows:
15th May 98
Red LED
Green LED
Status
Off
Off
NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m not powered up

or
In reset cycle
Off
On
Normal operation
Flashing
Flashing
NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m undergoing system code

download

68P02901W97-A
317
GSM-201-323
Resets
The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. A local power-on reset circuit is
provided. This provides a local reset based on the power supply tolerance.
The MCU-m is able to reset the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m via a message on the HDLC link
only.
Reset switch
There are two push button switches mounted on the NIU-m board but only one on the
NIU-HDSL-m board.
S
NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m reset button

When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides a timed
hard reset of the entire board.
MCU-m reset button (NIU-m only)

When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides a warm
reset to the MCU-m.
The MCU-m switch is located on the NIU-m to provide better access to this function
when the system is fully configured in the chassis.
Line
interface/framing
sections
The framing devices provide analogue to digital conversions and are used for the
encode/decode of the E1/T1 interfaces.
The NIU-m layout is common to E1 and T1, the only differences being in the PMC-Sierra
devices, associated crystal oscillators and line matching resistor values.
The framers provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, for passing to the
MCU-m, plus a version of the data that has not been through the jitter buffer, which is
used on board the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m for distance measurement.
The NIU-m and NIU-HDSL-m framers provide a 2.048 MHz extracted clock in the E1
option, whilst only the NIU-m provides a 1.544 MHz extracted clock for the T1 option.
The extracted clock signals are passed to the MCU-m.
The transmit and receive framing is controlled by a 125 ms reference pulse received from
the MCU-m.
Distance
measurement
The NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m provides the ability to perform network distance
measurement on either of the two network links. Measurement can only be performed
on one link at a time.
Three modes of operation are possible :
318
Mode 1. A pattern is transmitted in a selected network timeslot and the

corresponding receive timeslot is monitored for its return. The delay is measured
to an accuracy of 488 ns. The pattern is transmitted on the 6.12 second
reference signal.
Mode 2. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When received the pattern
is transmitted back in the next frame. The time between receipt and transmission
of the pattern is measured to an accuracy of 488 ns.
Mode 3. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When it is detected, a
strobe is generated to the MCU-m sync circuit.
68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Radio signalling
links
The radio signalling links (RSL) to the BSC from the main processor on the MCU-m are
64 kbit/s LAPD links. The MCU-m does not perform the LAPD encoding of the RSL link
data. This is performed on the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m by the 68360 processor.
The NIU-m and NIU-HDSL-m supports a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links may
both be on a single network link or shared between the two network links.
The RSL links must be sent to the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m as follows :
S
RSL link 1 is embedded in the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m control link, that is, it will be
in timeslot 0 of link 0 to the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m.
RSL link 2 is transmitted to the NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m in the same link and
timeslot number as it is intended to appear on the network interface.
The NIU-m and NIU-HDSL-m hardware supports switching for 64 kbit/s and 16 kbit/s
LAPD channels.
HDSL interface
The HDSL interface is only present on the NIU-HDSL-m for M-Cellcity+.
Control
The HDSL modules are controlled from the processor by an asynchronous serial data
stream. One control channel exists for each of the two modules.
Clock and data

The HDSL module (see HDSL functional diagram) interfaces directly to the line interface
unit (LIU) and FRAMER devices. The HDSL sourced data is selected as the input and
output data path by the control processor.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
319
HDSL module (M-Cellcity+)
GSM-201-323
HDSL module (M-Cellcity+)

Overview of
HDSL
The HDSL module converts between digital data, of any framed or unframed format, and
HDSL data.
HDSL is capable of transporting data at E1 rates as payloads over a total of two
twisted-pair cables (at extended ranges with respect to E1). These cables are generally
unshielded standard telephone cables.
HDSL functional
description
The HDSL data operates bidirectionally over each twisted copper wire pair at half the
overall data rate.
The module DSPs utilize advanced echo cancellation and signal processing techniques.
The module is controlled locally by a processor, which performs such tasks as error
monitoring and startup configuration. The processor also communicates with the
NIU-HDSL-m processor using an asynchronous control port.
The raw HDSL signals from the module are routed through the NIU-HDSL-m and then
translated at the HIM into true HDSL signals.
HDSL functional
diagram
The following shows a HDSL module functional block diagram:
BIDIRECTIONAL
TWISTED PAIR
BIDIRECTIONAL
TWISTED PAIR
CLOCK
DATA
CLOCK
DATA
CONTROL
320
DSP
ANALOGUE
FRONT END
DSP
ANALOGUE
FRONT END
HDSL
FRAMER
FLASH
PROCESSOR

68P02901W97-A
NVRAM
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Line termination modules

HIM modules
To facilitate the customer options that require connection to an M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+,
and to provide an EMC screen between the internal electronics and the environment; the
following modules terminate either the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) links and
two also provide High bit-rate digital subscriber line (HDSL) links:
S
E1 T43 interface module 75 ohm.
T1 or E1 (BIB) interface module 120 ohm.
HDSL interface module - 120 ohm (HIM-120 module).
HDSL interface module - 75 ohm (HIM-75 module).
Location of HIM module

The HIM module plugs into the interface panel, through a 37 pin D-type connector.
M-Cellcity
location diagram
The following shows the location of the T43/BIB module:
T43 OR BIB MODULE
(T43 shown)
J
7
M-Cellcity+
location diagram
The following shows the location of the HIM module (the second duplexer has been
removed for clarity).
HIM-120 or HIM-75 MODULE
(HIM-120 shown)
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
321
GSM-201-323
Description of
HIM
The line termination modules provide:
S
The impedance matching between the E1/T1 and HDSL circuit lines and the
NIU-m/NIU-HDSL-m.
An interface for:
Up to four inputs and four outputs (120 ohm balanced (HIM-120), 75 ohm
unbalanced (HIM-75)) E1/T1 lines (only two inputs/outputs are used).
Diagram of HIM
The following shows the line termination modules:
J0
J5
J2
HIM-120
J4
J11
J3
J8
J1
J6
J10
J7
J1
HIM-75
J6
J3
J0
J0
J8
BIB
J14
J1
J4
J10
J16
J13
J2
J11
J7
J1
T43
J17
J5
J0
322

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ digital/analogue signalling
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ digital/analogue signalling

Diagram of
M-Cellcity
Digital/analogue signalling:
DC-DC PSM
TCU-m 0
TCU-m 1
D4
Part of 3004742N01
Part of 3004742N01
SK3
D4
Part of 3004742N01
ORAC 0
ORAC 1
PL4
Part of 3004742N01
D4
PL4
PL4
Part of 3004742N01
D4
D5
D5
MCU
3004849N01
3004849N01
PL4
TRX 1
PL4
Part of 3004742N01
PL4
GPS
(Future)
PL4
Part of 3004742N01
PL1
PL4
PL4
PL4
TRX 0
Part of 3004742N01
PL4
Part of 3004742N01
J4
J4
NIU-m
or
NIU-HDSL-m
TTY
PORT
Part of 3004742N01
Part of 3004742N01
PL4
SK1
SK2
HIM-120/
HIM-75
NOTE: CABLE 3004742N01 IS A MULTIPLE CONNECTOR RIBBON CABLE WHICH INTERCONNECTS THE VARIOUS MODULES.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
323
GPS receiver
GSM-201-323
GPS receiver
Overview
An optional GPS receiver may be provided for site synchronization functions.
When fitted, the GPS receiver is controlled by the MCU-m module.
Location
The GPS receiver module is located on the side of the battery housing.
Location diagram
The following shows the location of the GPS receiver:
GPS RECEIVER
(OPTIONAL)
324

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
Chapter 4
Power supply system
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Chapter 4

41
41
41
42

Overview of PSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC-DC PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
43
43
44
45
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
411
411
411
412
412
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Power supply system
Power supply system

Overview of
power supply
system
The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ power supply system comprises:
S
An ac-dc power supply module (ac-dc PSM).
A dc-dc power supply module (dc-dc PSM).
A battery backup.
M-Cellcity
location diagram
The following shows the location of the power supply system components:
AC-DC PSM
BATTERY
DC-DC PSM
(MOUNTED FROM UNDERSIDE)
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
41
Power supply system
GSM-201-323
M-Cellcity+
location diagram
The following shows the location of the power supply system components:
AC-DC PSM
DC-DC PSM
BATTERY
(MOUNTED FROM UNDERSIDE)
42

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Power supply modules

Overview of
PSMs
The ac-dc and dc-dc power supply modules (PSMs) provide all internal voltages from
single phase ac mains in the nominal range 110 V to 230 V, 8.2 A to 4 A, 66 Hz to 45 Hz.
The alarm signals relating to mains fail, low voltage disconnect imminent and power
supply over temperature are generated within the dc-dc PSM and fed to the MCU-m.
Power supply
modules
The following shows the two power supply modules:
AC-DC PSM
15th May 98
DC-DC PSM

68P02901W97-A
43
GSM-201-323
AC-DC PSM
The ac-dc power supply module provides:
S
300 W of power at an output of +25 V dc which is fed via a cable loom to the
dc-dc PSM.
An ac supply for the cabinet heaters.
The ac-dc PSM consists of two converter modules:

S
One operates from an 88 to 264 V ac single phase input, with power factor
correction, and converts it to a high line 360 V dc output.
The second takes the high line 360 V dc and converts it to a +25 V supply which:
Is routed to the dc-dc PSM.
Float charges the 24 V battery.
Routes +25 V dc to the appropriate modules.
The ac supply for the three equipment heaters is fuse protected and controlled by a
voltage dependent switch within the ac-dc PSM.
NOTE
The ac-dc PSM will only work when plugged into the dc/dc PSM.
Functional diagram of ac-dc PSM

The following shows a functional block diagram of the ac-dc PSM:
AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
SK1
POWER FACTOR
CORRECTED
ac to 25 v dc
PL1
AC
INPUT
25 V
EMC FILTER
WITH FUSE
AC VOLTAGE
DEPENDENT
SWITCH
PL2
PL3
PL4
44

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Alarms and interfaces of ac-dc PSM

The ac-dc PSM sense signal and interfaces are tabulated below:
Connector
Signal
Remarks
PL1
AC input
Single phase input, via EMC filter.
PL2
AC switched output
TCU-m 0 heater supply.
PL3
AC switched output
TCU-m 1 heater supply.
PL4
AC switched output
MCU-m heater supply.
SK1
+25 V dc bus output Output to dc-dc PSM.
DC-DC PSM
The dc-dc power supply module provides:
S
Discrete voltages.
Alarms.
Calibration data.
Site address.
The dc-dc PSM consists of four converter modules, each of which use the +25 V dc input
to generate the +5 V, +3.3 V, +12 V, 12 V dc outputs respectively for driving logic,
interface and alarms.
Functional description of dc-dc PSM

The power supplies generated by the dc-dc PSM are distributed and used by the various
modules listed below. The power supply levels are all controlled by the dc-dc PSM, and
there are no adjustable parameters. A battery provides an auxiliary power source in the
event of ac mains failure.
Connector
Module
+3.3 V
+5 V
+12 V
12 V
+25 V
PL1
dc-dc PSM
SK2
Battery
SK3
TCU-m 0
SK4
TCU-m 0
SK3
TCU-m 1
SK4
TCU-m 1
SK3
MCU-m
SK4
MCU-m
SK3
NIU-m
NIU-HDSL-m
SK4
NIU-m
NIU-HDSL-m
SK3
GPS
X
X
NOTE
The supply output from the ac-dc PSM on a flying lead (SK1) and is connected
to PL1 on the dc-dc PSM.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
45
GSM-201-323
The module has a low voltage disconnect (LVD) relay which enables the dc-dc PSM to
disconnect the battery once its terminal voltage has reached a minimum, to protect the
battery.
Functional diagram of dc-dc PSM

The following shows a functional block diagram of the dc outputs:
DC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
CALIBRATION
AND SITE
ADRESS
SK5
ALARM
SIGNALS
+5 V
+5 V
PL1
SK3
+25 V dc
BUS INPUT
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
+12 V
12 V
+12 V
12 V
SK4
+25 V
BATTERY
46
S
K
2
LVD
RELAY

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Alarms and interfaces of dc-dc PSM

The dc-dc PSM alarms and power interfaces are tabulated below:
Connector
Signal
Remarks
SK1
+25 V dc bus input
+25 V dc input, from ac-dc PSM.
SK2
+25 V
Used to float charge the battery; and provides

battery backup.
SK3
+5 V
+3.3 V
SK4
F distribution
For
di ib i to the
h various
i
modules.
d l
+12 V
12 V
+25 V
SK5
15th May 98
MF Fail
Mains input failure.
LVD Imminent
When the +25 V unswitched supply drops to

20.5 V, an alarm is signalled.
Over temperature
(OT) alarm
Monitors the temperature of the dc-dc PSM.
Calibration
Provides RF calibration data.
Site Address
M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity site address.

68P02901W97-A
47
GSM-201-323
Alarms, warnings and shutdown of dc-dc PSM

The following events are triggered by monitoring of the power supply system. Some of
the events may trigger alarms at the OMC. Reference should be made to the following
manual Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC (GSM-100-501).
S
Main converter fail (MF) alarm

An alarm is generated when the ac-dc converter output falls to within
+23 1 V dc, at which time an MF alarm is generated.
All other power supplies (SK3 and SK4) remain active, being generated by
the battery backup.
Low Voltage Disconnect Imminent (LVDI) warning

After an ac mains failure (ac to dc converter fail) the unit will continue to
function using the battery back-up
During this time the +25 V output will be monitored and if the output voltage
falls to within +20.5 1 V dc, an LVDI warning will be generated.
Battery Low Voltage Disconnect (Battery LVD) shutdown

If the output voltage continues to fall and reaches the range +18 1 V dc, a
Battery LVD signal will be generated and the battery will be disconnected
from the load.
Under temperature (UT) alarm

After power is applied, if the temperature is below Temp 0 (T0) (T0 = 0 C)
the output of the +5 V, +3.3 V, +12 V and 12 V converters will not be
enabled until T0 has been reached.
Over temperature (OT) alarm

An alarm is generated when the temperature at the dc-dc PSM heatsink
reaches T1 5 C (T1 = 80 to >100 C, typically 85 C).
Over temperature shutdown

If the temperature continues to rise and reaches T1, both the ac-dc PSM
and dc-dc PSM are shutdown.
After such a shutdown, both the ac-dc PSM and dc-dc PSM will only be
allowed to reactivate when a temperature of Temp 2 (T2) is reached
(T2 = 55 to >80 C, typically 65 C). A hysterisis (H) of 20 C is used to
prevent oscillation between dc-dc PSM shutdown and reactivation.
Reactivation is achieved by disconnecting the battery (if fitted) and cycling
the mains.
48

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Power connections
The following shows a block diagram of the power supply interconnections between the
PSMs and the various modules.
TCU-m 0
AC-DC PSM
ORAC 0
D1
PL1
AC
INPUT
EMC
FILTER
TRX 0
+25 V dc
PL5
PL3
PL2
PL4
TCU-m 1
AC HEATERS
ORAC 1
D1
SK1
TRX 1
PL1
PL5
DC-DC PSM
+3.3 V, +5 V, +12 V,
12 V, +25 V
SK3
MCU-m
PL5
NIU-m
BATTERY
J5
S
K
2
or
NIU-HDSL-m
ORAC0 & ORAC1
ALARM & MCU
SITE MEMORY
PL1
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GPS
49
GSM-201-323
Memory system
The dc-dc PSM has on-board memory devices and associated circuitry. This is used to:
S
Facilitate initialization of the TCU-m modules.
Store site ID.
Functional description of memory

The memory system consists of two memory blocks and some arbitration logic as shown
in the functional diagram below. Buffering is also provided between the circuit and the
ORAC and MCU-m modules.
The TRX/ORAC memory contains calibration and information data associated with the
cabinet equipment. This memory is contained in a 32k flash EPROM and is used for
TCU-m alarms.
The arbitration logic allows the exchange of the TRX/ORAC memory information
between the two ORACs. The logic is implemented by the use of an ispGAL which may
be programmed via the programming plug.
The MCU-m memory contains the site identification number and the kit number of the
board on which it is stored. This information can be read via the MCU-m at the TTY
plug. The MCU-m memory is contained in a 2k flash EPROM.
Functional diagram of memory

The following shows the functional block diagram of the memory circuit:
TRX/ORAC
SETUP
MEMORY
PROGRAMMING
PLUG
MCU-m
SITE ID
MEMORY
ARBITRATION
LOGIC
BUFFERS
ORAC 1
410
ORAC 0

68P02901W97-A
MCU-m
SK5
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Battery backup
Battery backup
Overview
The power system incorporates a battery backup power system in the event of an ac
mains failure. The battery is able to supply sufficient power (for a maximum of five
minutes) for the system to perform the necessary tasks prior to complete system power
down.
M-Cellcity
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the battery:
LOCATION OF BATTERY
M-Cellcity+
location diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the battery (the second duplexer has been
removed for clarity).
LOCATION OF BATTERY
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
411
Battery backup
GSM-201-323
Battery pack
diagram
The following diagram shows the battery pack:
Description of
battery
The standard battery pack is made up from eleven, lead-acid 2 volt cells, enclosed in a
plastic case. The output is fused with a 20 amp, blade fuse, accessible from the outside
rear of the pack.
The battery is connected to the +25 V dc switched supply line, which under mains
healthy conditions will charge the battery pack.
The dc-dc PSM monitors the +25 V dc switched supply during battery backup conditions.
It generates an alarm when it reaches the Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) imminent level,
at 20.5 V, and ultimately de-energises the battery disconnect relay when the output
reaches 18 V.
The current required by the system is generally independent of the discharge voltage of
the battery pack, due to the use of dc-dc converters to provide the necessary system
voltages.
412

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
Chapter 5
Heat management
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
GSM-201-323
ii

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Chapter 5
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
51
52
53
53
53
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
54
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
iii
GSM-201-323
iv

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Heat management
Heat management
Heat
management
overview
The heat management of the M-Cellcity is described under the following:
S
Equipment heating.
Each of the MCU-m, TCU-m, NIU-m and NIU-HDSL-m modules must be at a
specified minimum temperature before the dc-dc PSM will produce the various
voltages required for the M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ to function.
Enclosure cooling.
Natural convection cooling by ambient airflow through the enclosure and across
the finned heatsinks of the electronic and power supply modules removes the
generated heat.
Module heaters
To ensure correct operation of the TCU-m modules, two heater mats are attached to the
heatsink of each ORAC and TRX module. These heater mats are used in extreme cold
operating environments to bring the TCU-m quickly to a specified working temperature.
To ensure correct operation of the MCU-m, NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m modules, one heater
mat is attached to the heatsink of the MCU-m module, the other mounted behind the
NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m module. The heater mats are used in extreme cold operating
environments to bring the MCU-m and NIU-m or NIU-HDSL-m modules quickly to a
specified working temperature.
Each heater mat has two elements sized for either 110 V ac or 230 V ac. The
ac-dc PSM selects the appropriate element depending on the ac input.
All heater mats are fused via a current fuse next to the ac input of the ac-dc PSM.
Each mat also has an over temperature thermal fuse on the mat. When this fuse has
ruptured, the appropriate unit must be returned for repair.
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
51
Heat management
GSM-201-323
Diagram of
heaters
The following shows the functional block diagram of the heater circuit:
AC INPUT
AC-DC PSM
SELECTING EITHER
110 V OR 230 V
HEATERS
EMC FILTER
WITH FUSE
MCU-m
HEATER
MAT
NIU-m
HEATER
MAT
OR
NIU-HDSL-m
HEATER
MAT
52

68P02901W97-A
RF0
HEATER
MAT
RF1
HEATER
MAT
ORAC 0
HEATER
MAT
ORAC 1
HEATER
MAT
TCU-m 0
TCU-m 1
15th May 98
GSM-201-323
Enclosure cooling
Enclosure cooling
Overview of
cooling
Each of the electronic and power supply modules have a finned heatsink. All are used to
remove heat in the temperature range of up to 50 by natural convection.
Diagram of
cooling
The following shows the finned heatsinks:
15th May 98

68P02901W97-A
53
Airflow
GSM-201-323
Airflow
Overview of
airflow
Cabinet cooling is by natural convection only.
The ambient cooling airflow is channelled through the base and front of the cabinet,
across the front of each of the electronic and power supply modules, and vented through
the top of the cabinet.
Diagram of
airflow
The following shows the ambient cooling airflow through the cabinet:
AIRFLOW
BUILDING
WALL
ELECTRONIC
MODULES
ELECTRONIC
MODULES
FRONT ENTRY FOR AIRFLOW
WALL BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
FRONT COVER
ELECTRONIC
MODULES
BOTTOM ENTRY FOR AIRFLOW
54

68P02901W97-A
15th May 98
CHAPTER 1
SITE PREPARATION
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 3
COMMISSIONING
CHAPTER 4
DECOMMISSIONING THE
EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 4
DECOMMISSIONING THE
EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 3
COMMISSIONING
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 1
SITE PREPARATION
Category 423
Installation and Configuration
15th May 98
Installation and Configuration: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
ii

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Category 423
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1

E1/T1/HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
12
14
15
15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
16
16
17
17
18

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
19
19
110
110
110
111
111

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
112
112
112
112

Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
113

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
114

115
115
115

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
117
117
117
117
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
iii
GSM-201-423
iv
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
118
118
119

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
120
120
121
122
123

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
129
129
129
129

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
130
131
132
133
133
135
Antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
136

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
137
137

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
139
139
E1/T1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
140
140

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
141
142
143
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
144
Chapter 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
22
22

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423

24
24
24

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
27
28

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
210
211
212
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
213

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
216
216
217
217
219
221
221

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223
223
223
223
225

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
227
227
228
228
229
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
230
Chapter 3
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
34
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
35
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
vi

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
37
Chapter 4
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
46
47

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
Chapter 1
Site preparation
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
ii

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Chapter 1

E1/T1/HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
12
14
15
15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
16
16
17
17
18

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
19
19
110
110
110
111
111

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
112
112
112
112

Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
113

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
114

115
115
115

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
117
117
117
117
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
118
118
119
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
iii
GSM-201-423
iv

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
120
120
121
122
123

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
129
129
129
129

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
130
131
132
133
133
135
Antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
136

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
137
137

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
139
139
E1/T1/HDSL link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
140
140

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
141
142
143
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
144

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Overview of site preparation
Overview of site preparation

Introduction to
site preparation
This chapter contains information that should be read before beginning the actual
installation.
NOTE
Unless otherwise stated the term M-Cellcity refers to both M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+.
Prior to the physical installation of an M-Cellcity unit, there is a requirement to perform
the following procedures:
Description
Procedure
Site visit.
Details the sequence of events and procedures to

be performed at the site before actual installation.
Preparing the site.
Contains details of physical site requirements.
Earthing the site.
Details site earth requirements.
Unpacking the installation kit.
Details how to unpack the installation kit.
Mounting the wall bracket.
Details the procedure to be used for mounting the

M-Cellcity wall mounting bracket.
Installing the power & earth

cabling.
Details the procedures to be used for power and

earth cabling installation.
Installing the antenna cabling, and

antenna configuration.
Details the procedures to be used for antenna

cable installation and antenna configuration.
Installing the E1/T1/HDSL link

cabling.
Details the procedures to be used for E1/T1/HDSL

link cable installation.
Installing the solar cover on the

wall bracket.
Details the procedure to be adopted if the

installation includes mounting the solar cover. The
procedures for mounting the chassis are detailed
in Chapter 2.
E1/T1/HDSL
links
GSM and DCS1800 systems can use three types of operating links; E1, T1 and HDSL.
S
The E1 link uses 2.048 Mbit/s links which accommodate thirty two 64 kbit/s
timeslots, of which 31 are available for pulse code modulation (PCM) and data
channels.
The T1 link uses 1.544 Mbit/s links which accommodate twenty four 64 kbit/s
timeslots, all of which are available for pulse code modulation (PCM) and data
channels.
The HDSL link provides high speed transmission over inexpensive but voice grade,
twisted copper pair wiring.
Throughout this manual, reference is made to E1/T1/HDSL links. Read the information
in the context of the type of link used.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
11
Tools and materials
GSM-201-423
Tools and materials

Introduction
The following tables list the recommended tools and materials for carrying out the
procedures in this manual.
Two general tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites.
Cellular tool kit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning.
A recommended M-Cellcity tool kit is listed in Table 1-3.
GSM cellular tool

kit number 1
The following table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number 1:
Table 1-1 GSM cellular tool kit number 1
Quantity
1 pair
Description
Safety goggles
Hard hat
Dust mask
1 pair
Ear defenders
Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
Antistatic mat
Torch
5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in)
Padlock to fit cantilever tool box
Zipped tool case
Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive)
10 in adjustable spanner
1 each
Combination spanners A/F:1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in,
5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 in and 1 in
3/4 in
Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in)
Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb)
Torx driver set (T10 to T30)
Allen key set A/F
Claw hammer
Pipe cutter
Cone cutter (up to 1 in)

. . . continued
12

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Tools and materials

Quantity
1
Junior hacksaw
10
Replacement blades for junior hacksaw
300 mm hacksaw
10
Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw
1 pair
6 in side cutters
1 pair
6 in heavy-duty side cutters
1 pair
Wire cutters
1 pair
Cable shears
15th May 98
Description
Knife with retractable blade
1 pair
8 in combination pliers
1 pair
General purpose pliers
1 pair
Snipe nose pliers
1 each
Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt
1 each
Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in
Set of jewellers screwdrivers
Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)
Transpower 110 V (twin outlet)
Kango 501 110 V
M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501
Piston drill P221 115V
24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in
110 V plugs
6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)
Soldering iron
Soldering iron stand
Hand crimp tool
Crimp tool for type 43 connectors
BNC crimp tool with inserts
Telephone plug crimp tool
50 mm crimp tool
Cable tie gun
4 ft wooden step ladder
Table vice
10 in vice grips
7.5 m tape measure
12 in steel rule

68P02901W98-A
13
Tools and materials
GSM-201-423

Quantity
Description
Spirit level (3 ft)
Centre punch
Pocket scriber
10 in half round file
GSM cellular tool

kit number 2
Quantity
14
Description
Antistatic mat
Marker pen
Zipped tool pack case
Large sectioned storage box
Torx driver set including sizes T10 and T30
1 pair
Flush cut wire cutters
1 pair
Light duty cable cutters
1 pair
Industrial scissors
1 pair
GP serrated jaw pliers
1 pair
Snipe nose pliers
1 pair
Straight point tweezers
Screw/nut driver set
Screw gripping driver
Null modem
RS232 mini tester
Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder
Cable tie gun
M to M gender changer
Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Tools and materials
M-Cellcity tool
kit
The following table lists the contents of the M-Cellcity tool kit.
Table 1-3 M-Cellcity tool kit
Quantity
Description
19 mm combination spanner
2 1/4 in flat bladed screwdriver
1/4 in square drive
13 mm socket (long)
7 mm socket (long)
6 mm socket (long)
5.5 mm socket (long)
Universal joint
1/4 in to hex adaptor
T20 tamperproof bit
T10 tamperproof bit
5 mm hex tamperproof bit
Additional
equipment
The following table lists the suggested additional equipment that may be required to
install and commission M-Cellcity equipment:
Table 1-4 Additional equipment
Quantity
1
15th May 98
Description
AC power generator for power tools (if mains power is not available)

68P02901W98-A
15
Site requirements and considerations
GSM-201-423

Introduction
The base site area, where the M-Cellcity is to be installed, must meet the following
structural and environmental criteria provided in this section.
NOTE
The M-Cellcity is mounted on a wall, or similar flat surface, by means of a wall
bracket. It may also be pole mounted using the same wall bracket and the
pole securing brackets and straps.
Structural
requirements
Load bearing requirement of mounting surface
The designated mounting surface must be capable of bearing a maximum load of 36 kg,
at the installation point, to adequately support the weight of the fully-equipped M-Cellcity,
including wall bracket.
See the section entitled Mounting guidelines for details of the various categories of
mounting surface materials.
WARNING
In order to preserve safety, local specialist assistance should be sought for
more specific mounting recommendations, since detailed information on the
subject is beyond the scope of this manual.
Clear area requirement

A clear area of 500 mm is required around each enclosure.
16

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Wall mounting
plan
Figure 1-1 shows the M-Cellcity wall mounting plan, with drilling template for the wall
bracket, with dimensions. The required 500 mm clearance all round is also shown.
DRILLING TEMPLATE
115 mm
244.5 mm
670 mm
45 mm
WALL BRACKET
MOUNTING HOLES
Note: 500 mm FREE SPACE IS REQUIRED ALL AROUND THE M-Cellcity
Figure 1-1 M-Cellcity wall mounting plan
Environmental
requirements
The environmental limits for equipment operation are defined in Technical Description
(Category 323).
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
17
GSM-201-423
Site evaluation
Either the senior engineer or a nominated representative should visit the site to evaluate
the installation considerations and requirements. Points to observe include:
S
Site access.
Clear area around proposed installation location.
Height of proposed installation location.
Lifting equipment required.
Method of reaching proposed installation location, such as:
Hydraulic lift (also known as a Cherry picker).
Scaffolding.
A pair of step ladders.
Whether access should be restricted below, requiring:
Barrier.
Pedestrian walkway.
Safety officer.
Availability of mains power for tools, or is a generator needed?
Once these points have been observed, an installation strategy may be planned and all
necessary equipment and personnel arranged.
18

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Visiting the site
Visiting the site

Introduction
When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the instructions provided in
this section.
Before departure
to site
Before departing to the site:
1.
Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, and hardware to
carry out the task. Check the site folder for any special requirements.
2.
Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of the teams estimated time
of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. This will usually have
been dealt with previously, but it is always advisable to make sure that the
information has been passed on.
3.
Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see if anything needs to be
taken to the site and collect any outstanding work for the site to be visited.
4.
Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as local
regulations may change.
Arrival at all sites

When entering any site:
1.
Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC or MSC. Contact
the local OMC and local MSC to announce the teams arrival before entering the
site.
2.
Enter the site and check for building alarms, for example intruder alarms, that may
have been activated by entry.
3.
If fitted, disable the Halon gas systems and any alarms that have been activated
by entry.
4.
Read any local instructions.
5.
Arrange with the OMC or MSC to check the E1/T1/HDSL link, as soon as possible.
Arriving at
occupied sites
In any exchange or occupied building, contact the person in charge or caretaker of the
building, who will explain local regulations. This person may also advise teams on
parking, rubbish removal, and canteen facilities.
Be as polite and helpful as possible; colleagues may well have to go back to the site at a
later date.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
19
Visiting the site
GSM-201-423
Leaving site
during
installation and
commissioning
period
When leaving a site:
1.
At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system, if fitted, and any
alarms that have been disabled.
2.
Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the teams departure.
3.
Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC staff have gone home, contact
the Network Control Centre or OMC and inform them of the teams departure.
4.
Sign out of the building as necessary.

NOTE
Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.
Rubbish on site
Clear rubbish from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated by the
customer.
WARNING
Do not burn rubbish, as packaging might give off toxic gases.
On-site safety
Responsibilities of senior engineer
The senior engineer must:
S
Advise all new staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place.
Ensure that under no circumstances must anyone be permitted to move GSM

equipment without assistance. Enclosures must be safely positioned at all times.
Responsibilities of all personnel

All personnel must:
S
Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and
when local regulations require them.
Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling, this is particularly
important when drilling overhead ironwork.
Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress.
Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
Observe safety recommendations when lifting equipment.
Wear a safety harness and line with a shock absorber anchored to a suitable point,
and observe all safety regulations when working at height.
Stop any work that you are supervising should any person in your team not be properly
protected.
When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This is to
prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the locking edge.
110

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Visiting the site
Weather
conditions
Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind and other inclement weather
conditions when installing the M-Cellcity. This is especially important when using a
ladder to gain access.
WARNING
Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder, scaffolding or other
method of access if you feel unsafe to do so under prevailing weather
conditions.
Maintenance
cover
Motorola recommend that an M-Cellcity is not installed during inclement weather
conditions. If this cannot be avoided, some form of maintenance cover should be used.
NOTE
A maintenance cover is not supplied with the M-Cellcity equipment and should
be provided by the customer if required.
Installation and commissioning procedures for an M-Cellcity enclosure are dependent on
the weather conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines
should be considered before commencing work:
S
No access.
Access with maintenance cover.
Access without maintenance cover.
No access
Access should not be attempted to an enclosure during the following actual or imminent
inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:
S
Strong winds.
Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
During an electrical storm.
Access with maintenance cover

Access may be made to an enclosure under the following conditions with the use of the
maintenance cover:
S
Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a problem.
Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the maintenance
cover:
15th May 98
No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.
When the temperature is between 40 _C to +50 _C.

68P02901W98-A
111
Preparing the site
GSM-201-423
Preparing the site

Introduction
The following provides information on the preparation of an M-Cellcity site.
It contains a general overview of site requirements. For specific sites, refer to the
site-specific documentation.
Base site
structure
The base site structure should be designed to meet accepted cellular system
specifications. Additionally, the site must meet the environmental and electrical operating
criteria as listed in the Performance Specifications for the M-Cellcity equipment.
Site
requirements
The customer should provide secure access from unauthorized personnel, ample
protection from fire, and adequate lighting and access to the equipment for operation and
maintenance. If appropriate, provision should be made for a cable duct or conduit with
sufficient space for communications cables, mains cables, earth cables, and antenna RF
cables.
A minimum clearance of 500 mm on all faces must be allowed for access to the
equipment.
Site access
Ensure the area available and overhead clearance is sufficient to accommodate turning
or reversing the delivery vehicle, and allow sufficient space to unload the M-Cellcity from
the vehicle.
Site layout
Figure 1-1 in Site requirements and considerations shows the M-Cellcity wall
mounting plan, with dimensions.
112

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Earthing and transient protection
Earthing and transient protection

Site earthing
This manual summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the
Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations (68P81150E62), for detailed earthing
information.
S
The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its
power source).
There is a main earth protection terminal (stud) located on the M-Cellcity wall
bracket, which is connected to the ac-dc PSM earth protection stud on the
M-Cellcity chassis once the chassis is installed.
Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and making a
connection to the wall bracket earthing stud before beginning the installation of the
M-Cellcity chassis.
Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthing information.
E1/T1/HDSL link
transient and
lightning
protection
E1/T1/HDSL links connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection
as part of the High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) Interface Module (HIM), with
75 ohm E1 line termination (HIM-75) or HIM, with 120 ohm E1 line termination
(HIM-120).
Ensure the receive and transmit antenna connections to the building are fed through
coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices. EMP devices are customer/country
dependent and Motorola cannot recommend a specific type.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
113
Earthing the site
GSM-201-423
Earthing the site

Introduction
The following covers the earthing procedure for an M-Cellcity site. This manual
summarizes general procedures; refer to Motorola document EDE/SW/93/041D for
detailed information.
NOTE
The term earth in this manual equates to the term ground used in associated
GSM documentation.
Requirements
Each site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis as conditions will
vary considerably depending on local soil conditions and site topography. It is essential
that a site survey and soil resistance test be performed before installation. The site
architect defines the site and foundation earthing requirements to ensure a resistance of
less than 10 ohms. Figure 1-2 shows the earthing requirements for an M-Cellcity site.
MAIN BUILDING EARTH
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKET
MAIN EARTH CABLE
EARTH BAR
EARTH STRAP
CHASSIS
AC/DC
PSU
EARTHED THROUGH
AC MAINS CABLE
Figure 1-2 M-Cellcity earthing requirements
114

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installation kit delivery and packaging

Equipment
delivery
Before the M-Cellcity installation kit arrives, installation personnel should designate an
area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also be suitable
for unpacking the equipment, if necessary. Consult with the freight or moving company
and the owners of the building (if applicable) to select this area.
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along
with the necessary moving pallets and padding. Use the pallets and padding to move the
equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
Installation kit
equipment
The installation kit comprises equipment supplied to enable the wall bracket to be
mounted and the solar cover to be mounted temporarily prior to installation of the
M-Cellcity chassis.
The installation kit comprises:
S
Carton A; contains the following;
Battery.
Pole mounting fittings (Optional).
Banding tool (Optional one per site).
Four M6 security screws (solar cover).
4 mm hex tamperproof tool bit (solar cover).
Plastic bungs (solar cover).
5 mm hex tamperproof tool bit

(carrying/lifting handle, security plate and chassis to wall mounting bracket).
Security plate.
Ten M8 security bolts.
Two rubber insert washers (chassis to wall mounting bracket).
T20 tamperproof tool bit (bottom panel).
T10 tamperproof tool bit (cable clamps).
Conduit termination bracket and fixings.

S
Carton B; containing the wall mounting bracket.
Carton C; containing the solar cover.
The M-Cellcity installation kit is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The

contents are shown in Figure 1-3.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
115
GSM-201-423
CARTON A
CARTON C
CARTON B
Figure 1-3 M-Cellcity installation kit
116

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Unpacking the installation kit
Unpacking the installation kit

Introduction
The following describes the procedure for opening the shipping container and unpacking
the installation kit.
NOTE
It is recommended that the installer be familiar with all of the following
procedure before beginning to unpack and install the equipment.
Tool required
This procedure requires a knife.
Unpacking the
installation kit
WARNING
The assembled M-Cellcity installation kit weighs approximately 6 kg.
Observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying.
CAUTION
Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way
during this procedure.
To remove the equipment from the container, and with reference to Figure 1-3:
1.
Open the top of the cardboard container.
2.
Remove the three cartons.
3.
Open and unpack each carton (there is a label on each carton listing its content).
4.
Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage
to the transport company.
NOTE
If there is any delay to erecting the M-Cellcity, then a weather proof
environment must be found to store the equipment.
Disposing of the
packing material
To return the packing material:
15th May 98
1.
Put the three cartons back in the shipping container.
2.
Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country Project Manager.

68P02901W98-A
117
Mounting guidelines
GSM-201-423
Mounting guidelines
Introduction
This section provides general guidelines on mounting the M-Cellcity enclosure.
Local specialist assistance should be sought for more specific mounting
recommendations, since detailed information on the subject is beyond the scope of this
manual.
Mounting
guidelines
Table 1-5 shows fixing design and specifications for different types of mounting material:
NOTE
Ideally, the M-Cellcity should be fixed to a Group A (i) material, with or
without render.
Table 1-5 M-Cellcity fixing material specifications
Group/category
Description of material
Mounting guidelines
Group A (i)
Concrete, brickwork,
The uppermost fixings should have
stonework, dense aggregate the weight of at least 600 mm of
blockwork and reconstituted solid construction above them.
stone.
Group A (ii)
Lightweight, blockwork
(solid), lightweight precast
concrete units (solid).
Group A (iii)
Hollow brickwork, hollow

clay pots and tiles, hollow
concrete units.
Group A general
The fixings should not penetrate more than 70 mm, or less than
50 mm. Construction should be of at least 100 mm thickness.
Typical recommended fixings are:
Type S Fischer nylon wallplugs, with hex headed M12 bolts.
The uppermost fixings should have

the weight of at least 900 mm of
solid construction above them.
Type FSA stainless steel A4 or Fischer sleeve anchor.

Group B (i)
Renders and mortars

applied directly to
backgrounds in Group A,
with or without surface tiles
and mosaics.
Where the surface materials are up

to 50 mm thickness, add 300 mm to
the height of construction above the
highest fixing specified for Group A.
Group B (ii)
Renders and mortars

applied directly to
backgrounds in Group A,
with or without intermediate
insulation.
Where the standoff from the face of

the background to the face of the
cladding is between 50 mm and
100 mm, check first that vapour
barriers or sealed cavities will not be
damaged. Add 600 mm to the
heights of construction above the
highest fixing specified for Group A.
. . . continued
118

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Mounting guidelines
Table 1-5 M-Cellcity fixing material specifications

Group/category
Description of material
Group C
Composite lightweight
cladding panels, metal
cladding and sheeting over
steel or timber framing.
Group D
Curtain walling and windows

with glass, metal, plastic or
other lightweight sheet
materials, with or without
insulation.
Group E
Cavity construction of two

substantially independent
leaves of construction,
consisting of an inner leaf of
Group A materials and an
outer leaf of Group C or D
materials.
Mounting guidelines
In general, it is not recommended
that the M-Cellcity is fixed to these
claddings. Apart from the inherent
weakness of these materials,
penetration of such claddings can
cause cold bridging, moisture
ingress and loss of insulating
properties. Where these claddings
have an external support frame
capable
ca
able of supporting
su orting the M-Cellcity,
it may be possible to fix to it. The
specialist advice of the cladding
system manufacturer must be
sought if such a fixing is
contemplated.
Flatness of walls
The walls onto which the M-Cellcity enclosure is intended to be installed should have no
variations in depth greater than 5 mm. This criteria applies over a width of 504.5 mm
(120 mm either side of the fixing points) and a height of 715 mm (45 mm above and
below the fixing points).
If the wall required does not meet this criteria, then measures should be taken to produce
these levels, either by modifying the wall itself to produce a flat area, or by some addition
which creates a flat surface or set of points on the wall.
Any changes can alter the wall characteristics, and additions can add extra stresses, so
advice should be sought on the best method of producing the flat surface required. If the
wall plus additions is considered to be strong enough by the survey, then the wall will
correctly to support the M-Cellcity enclosure weight.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
119
Mounting the wall bracket
GSM-201-423

Introduction
An M-Cellcity enclosure is not mounted directly onto the wall but to a custom mounting
bracket. This procedure provides information on mounting the wall bracket to the
allocated position on the wall. It is necessary to mount the wall bracket before installing
an M-Cellcity or any associated cabling.
WARNING
The wall bracket weighs approximately 3 kg. Care should be taken when
lifting, carrying and mounting the wall bracket, especially when working above
floor level.
CAUTION
It is recommended that local assistance is sought to determine the correct type
of fixing for the mounting site material.
Refer to the Mounting guidelines section for material classification and fixing
guidelines, including type of fixing to be used and fixing depth.
Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench. The
torque values should be chosen to suit the wall material and the total weight of
the M-Cellcity installation.
Tools required
Wall mounting
This procedure requires the following tools:
S
Heavy-duty electric drill or Kango 501 heavy-duty hammer drill (as required).
Masonry drill bit, 25 mm diameter, 150 mm deep (or as required).
Roll of insulating tape (or similar).
Spirit level.
6 m (20 ft) ac extension cable.
100 V ac isolation transformer, or ac power generator with 110 V ac power outlet.
Ratchet with 19 mm socket.
Torque wrench.
Pole mounting
120
Spirit level.
Ruler.
Banding tool.
Hammer.
68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Preparing the
tools
Wall mounting
Since the wall bracket will be mounted above ground/floor level, it is necessary to
prepare the tools prior to climbing/lifting to the installation location.
To prepare the tools:
1.
Measure length of the bolt and, using insulating tape, mark the required drilling
depth on all drill bits to be used.
2.
Connect the heavy-duty hammer drill to the 110 V ac isolation transformer.
3.
Connect the 110 V ac isolation transformer to the mains ac power outlet. Use the
ac extension cable as necessary.
NOTE
If mains power is not available, use an ac power generator with 110 V ac outlet
or 240 V ac outlet with 110/240 V ac isolation transformer instead.
WARNING
Observe and follow all safety instructions supplied with the ac power
generator before starting.
4.
If using an ac power generator, start the generator at this point.
5.
Place all necessary tools and the equipment to be installed into the hydraulic lift
cage.
Pole mounting
Place all necessary tools and the equipment to be installed into the hydraulic lift cage, or
to one side of the step ladders.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
121
GSM-201-423
Drilling holes for

the mounting
bolts
To drill the holes for the mounting bolts:
1.
Carefully position the wall bracket over the mounting point, in accordance with the
site plan. Ensure the wall bracket is level using the spirit level.
2.
Use the wall bracket to mark the location of each of the four mounting holes.
WARNING
Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.
CAUTION
Drilling masonry and brickwork produces dust, which is harmful to equipment
and wiring.
Protect the M-Cellcity and any nearby equipment from dust.
Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment.
Clean up any accumulated debris from the installation area carefully before
exposing the equipment.
122
3.
Drill four pilot holes in the wall, to the depth indicated by the tape on the drill bit.
4.
Drill the four holes in the wall for the mounting bolts, to the depth indicated by the
tape on the drill bit.
5.
Insert the recommended wall fixings.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Mounting the
wall bracket
Wall mounting
To mount the wall bracket:
WARNING
The wall bracket weighs approximately 3 kg. Handle with care, especially
when working above floor level.
1.
How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ...
Then ...
By conduit
Go to step 2
Not
Go to step 4
2.
Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kit; carton A.
3.
With reference to Figure 1-4, locate and secure the conduit termination bracket to
the wall mounting bracket, using the two M8 screws, plain and spring washers, and
nuts provided.
WALL BRACKET
M-Cell city + CONDUIT TERMINATION

BRACKET
M-Cell city CONDUIT TERMINATION

BRACKET
Figure 1-4 Fixing the conduit termination bracket
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
123
4.
GSM-201-423
Move the wall bracket to the installation point on the wall.

NOTE
There are four mounting holes on the wall bracket. Refer to Figure 1-5 for the
locations
5.
Align the holes in the wall bracket with the wall fixings.
6.
Place a spring washer followed by a flat washer onto each bolt. Motorola suggests
using M12 bolts with suitable wall fixings to mount the wall bracket.
7.
Secure the wall bracket loosely to the wall, using all four bolts with washers.
8.
Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight and level and
then tighten all four bolts to the required torque.
NOTE
The torque is dependant upon the type of material the wall bracket is mounted
on and the type of fixings used. Seek Local specialist assistance if necessary
to determine the required torque.
124

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Figure 1-5 shows an M-Cellcity wall bracket.
WALL BRACKET
WALL BRACKET MOUNTING

BOLTS
Figure 1-5 Mounting the M-Cellcity wall bracket
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
125
GSM-201-423
Pole mounting
To pole mount the wall bracket:
WARNING
The wall bracket weighs approximately 3 kg. Handle with care, especially
when working above floor level.
1.
How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ...
Then ...
By conduit
Go to step 2
Not
Go to step 4
2.
Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kit; carton A.
3.
With reference to Figure 1-4, locate and secure the conduit termination bracket to
the wall bracket, using the two M8 screws, plain and spring washers provided.
4.
Locate pole mounting fittings from installation kit; carton A.
5.
With reference to Figure 1-6, fit a clamping bracket in each of the C channels. Fit
and secure both C channels on the back of the wall bracket, using the two M8
screws, spring washers and nuts provided.
6.
With reference to Figure 1-6, thread a bucklestrap, with ears towards the wall
bracket, through each clamping bracket.
EARS
WALL BRACKET
C CHANNEL
BUCKLE
BUCKLESTRAP
CLAMPING BRACKET
Figure 1-6 Pole fixing detail
126

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
NOTE
This procedure is a two person operation, one to position and hold the wall
bracket, the other to operate the banding tool to tension and secure the
bucklestraps.
7.
Position and hold the wall bracket at the installation point on the pole.
8.
Pass the bucklestrap around the pole and up through the buckle, twice.
NOTE
The buckle must be positioned such that there is sufficient clearance (330 mm
long by 220 mm wide minimum) to enable the operator to manipulate the
clamping tool in step 11.
9.
Pull on loose end of the bucklestrap until the wall bracket sits lightly on the pole.
10.
With reference to Figure 1-7, prepare the clamping tool by ensuring that the handle
is at the end of the thread, and the gripper block is close to the nose of the tool.
CUTTER LEVER
NOSE
HANDLE
GRIPPER BLOCK
GRIPPER LEVER
Figure 1-7 Clamping tool
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
127
11.
128
GSM-201-423
With reference to Figure 1-7:

Step
Action
a.
Holding the tool in the left hand, with the gripper lever uppermost, thread
the bucklestrap through both the nose and gripper lever block.
b.
Push the nose of the tool against the buckle, and grip the bucklestrap by
applying thumb pressure on the gripper lever.
c.
Keeping the applied thumb pressure on the gripper lever; tension the
bucklestrap by turning the handle clockwise.
d.
Swing the tool over the buckle, while maintaining bucklestrap tension.
NOTE: This movement increases the tension on the bucklestrap and, to
avoid breakage, the handle must be reversed slightly as the tool
is swung over.
e.
Cut bucklestrap, by pulling on the cutter lever, and slide tool off in the
same position; or tension will be lost.
12.
With reference to Figure 1-6, hammer down the ears over the cut and flattened
bucklestrap.
13.
Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight and level.
14.
Repeat step 8 to step 13 for the bottom clamping bracket.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Power and earth cabling
Power and earth cabling

Introduction
This section provides the required specifications of ac power supply isolation, cabling,
and cable routing to be provided for the M-Cellcity enclosure.
AC isolator
An ac overcurrent circuit breaker and RCD should be used in the ac power supply feed to
the M-Cellcity enclosure. This circuit breaker should be of dual pole type, with sufficient
contactor gap to be used as an isolator, and should meet the requirements of standard
EN 60898.
The nominal required current rating is:
S
4 A at 230 V ac.
8.5 A at 110 V ac.
Power cabling
thermal
properties
The thermal properties of cabling used to supply power must meet the following
specifications:
Cable type
3-core mains rated, either armoured or conduit routed.
Maximum conductor temperature

Continuous operation:
+105 _ C.
Emergency operation:
+130 _ C (max. 125 hours/year).
Short circuit condition:
+160 _ C (max. 5 seconds).
Resistance to Flame
The cabling to be used to supply power should be of low-smoke halogen-free
classification, with flame-retardant properties. Resistance to flame should be tested to
IEC 332-3 (IEC 332-1).
Cable routeing
An adequate means should be provided for routeing cables from the main power source
to the M-Cellcity enclosure. To prevent the possibility of damage to exposed cables,
Motorola recommend the ac power cables are routed inside a conduit.
WARNING
Do not make ac input power connections at the main ac power source at this
time.
NOTE
The E1/T1/HDSL link is also to be routed to the M-Cellcity enclosure, in a
separate conduit.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
129
Installing power and earth cabling
GSM-201-423

Introduction
This section describes the procedure for routeing power and earth cabling to the wall
bracket prior to installation of the chassis.
WARNING
The M-Cellcity enclosure must be earthed with a conductor capable of
carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection device.
Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.
The ac input power connections must not be made at the main power source
at this time. The power-up procedure is part of the commissioning process
detailed in Chapter 3.
Tools required
130
Screwdriver set.
Wire stripping tool.
Crimping tool.
Small hacksaw.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Connecting the
site main earth
The main site earth is to be connected to the wall bracket, and then a jumper cable
connected to the main earth stud on the ac-dc PSM once the chassis has been installed.
To connect the main site earth to the wall bracket:
1.
Route a cable from the site main earth to the wall bracket.
2.
Strip approximately 10 mm of the pvc insulation from the end of the site main earth
cable, to expose the bare copper conductor.
3.
Crimp an M8 post connector to the main earth conductor.
4.
Place the earth post connector over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the
bottom edge of the wall bracket.
NOTE
Figure 1-8 and Figure 1-9 show the location of the wall bracket main earthing
stud.
5.
15th May 98
Fit a spring washer and M8 nut over the top of the connector onto the main
earthing stud, and tighten to a torque of 10 Nm.

68P02901W98-A
131
GSM-201-423
Earth connection
points
Figure 1-8 provides a view of the bottom of the M-Cellcity wall bracket, showing the main
earthing point:
WALL BRACKET
EARTH CONNECTOR
Figure 1-8 Underside of chassis, showing earth connection point

Figure 1-9 provides a view of the bottom of the M-Cellcity+ wall bracket, showing the
main earthing point:
WALL BRACKET
EARTH CONNECTOR
Figure 1-9 Underside of chassis, showing earth connection point

132

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
AC power
connector
The ac power connector is an 10 A IEC 3-pole type. The connections are:
S
The live power cable is brown or red.
The neutral cable is blue or black.
The earth cable is green and yellow.

WARNING
If the installation being carried out is to be completed at a later date (only the
back plate and solar cover are being installed) care should be taken to ensure
that no mains power connections are left floating. The installer should ensure
that an indication of the state of mains terminations is left with the unit, by
taping off potential live cables and by a clear warning label.
Routeing the ac
power cable to
the wall bracket
To install the conduit and attach to the conduit termination bracket (M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+):
WARNING
Ensure the mains ac power supply input switch is in the OFF position before
proceeding.
1.
Measure the length of cable conduit required to connect the wall bracket to the
mains ac power isolator, and cut the conduit to this length.
2.
Route the conduit from the ac power isolator to the wall bracket.
3.
Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket.
4.
Feed the ac power cable through the conduit, but do not connect the cables to
the isolator at this time.
NOTE
The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottom of the wall bracket.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
133
GSM-201-423
The following illustration provides a view of the ac power conduits, attached to the
conduit termination bracket on the M-Cellcity.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET
CONDUIT FOR AC POWER CABLE
Figure 1-10 AC cable braket routeing

The following illustration provides a view of the ac power conduits, attached to the
conduit termination bracket on the M-Cellcity+.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT FOR AC POWER CABLE
NOTE: THE AC POWER CABLE IS NOT SHOWN
Figure 1-11 AC cable braket routeing

134

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Connecting the
cables to the ac
power supply
isolator
To connect the earth, live and neutral cables to the power supply isolator:
WARNING
Ensure the mains ac power supply input isolator switch is in the OFF position
before proceeding.
See the CAUTION in the section covering ac power connector.
15th May 98
1.
Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulated cover,
and remove the cover.
2.
Secure the screen at the entry gland.
3.
Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the mains input
isolator, and secure.
4.
Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to the live connection in the mains input
isolator, and secure.
5.
Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection in the mains
input isolator and secure.
6.
Do not connect the screen, but cut it back level with the outer insulation.
7.
Refit and secure the terminal block insulated cover, and refit the screws and
washers.

68P02901W98-A
135
Antenna system
GSM-201-423
Antenna system
Antenna cabling
guidelines
Refer to the site specific documentation for detailed antenna configurations and
connection procedures. Observe these guidelines when installing antenna cabling
jumper leads:
NOTE
The M-Cellcity is an omni site with one antenna, whilst the M-Cellcity+ is an
omni site with two external antennas.
S
Use jumper leads to make connections from the antenna window to the N-type
antenna connector on the underside of the chassis.
NOTE
Motorola recommend the use of 90 connectors.
Fabricate these jumper leads on-site from RG214 or Superflex, unless the site
installation plan specifies a different type of cable.
Keep the jumper leads as short as possible, to minimize signal losses.
For reference, the line loss per metre at 900 MHz is:
S
Superflex:
0.117 db
RG214:
0.23 db
CAUTION
All antenna feeders entering a building should be connected through coaxial
EMP protectors.
136

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing antenna cabling

Introduction
This section describes the procedure for installing antenna cabling for the M-Cellcity
enclosure.
Refer to Antenna system for information on the antenna system and cabling guidlines.
Tools required
S
Screwdriver set.
Ratchet with socket set.
Wire stripping and crimping tool.
Connecting the antenna

M-Cellcity
To connect a common transmit/receive antenna:
NOTE
It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to be used for the antenna
feeders.
When using an external antenna, select the supplied antenna cable or direct link cable,
ensure the antenna cable is routed through the centre aperture of the conduit termination
bracket, as shown in Figure 1-12.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT TERMINATION RACKET
CENTRAL APERTURE
Figure 1-12 Antenna cable bracket routeing
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
137
GSM-201-423
M-Cellcity+
To connect the common transmit/receive antennas:
NOTE
It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to be used for the antenna
feeders.
Using the select the supplied antenna cables or direct link cables, ensure the antenna
cables are routed through the centre apertures of the conduit termination bracket, as
shown in Figure 1-13.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT TERMINATION RACKET
CENTRAL APERTURES
Figure 1-13 Antenna cables bracket routeing
138

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
Antenna configurations (M-Cellcity+)
GSM-201-423
Antenna configurations (M-Cellcity+)

Introduction
This section provides information on antenna configations for the M-Cellcity+.
Configuration
The M-Cellcity+ antennas have an Omni 2 air combiner configuration. The site must be
fitted with two antennas and have 30 dB of isolation between them. The antennas can be
mounted by the side of each other or underneath each other.
NOTE
This mounting of the antennas must be completed by specialized engineers in
this field.
Diagram of
antenna
configurations
30 dB
30 dB
M-CellL city + OMNI 2 AIR COMBINERS
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
139
E1/T1/HDSL link
GSM-201-423
E1/T1/HDSL link
Introduction
The following provides information on the control signal cabling used in M-Cellcity
equipment.
NOTE
The internal control signal cabling within each M-Cellcity is assembled and
tested at the factory. No further action is necessary.
E1/T1/HDSL link
connections
CAUTION
The end-user is responsible for transient protection of the E1/T1 link
connected to Motorola equipment.
WARNING
If there is any possibility of exposed cables to/from the M-Cellcity being
damaged or interfered with in any way, all cables must be armoured or routed
inside armoured conduit.
Motorola requires that all E1/T1/HDSL link lines brought in from outside the building are
spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building entry point. Where this is not
practical, the end user may purchase an optional transient-protection board from
Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protection for the M-Cellcity sites.
There are three ways to make line connections:
NOTE
The M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ at this stage is not connected to the bracket. The
following references to HIM boards are for information only.
S
120 ohm twisted pair cable through the interface module - 120 ohm (HIM-120)
module mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the bottom cover.
NOTE
It is recommended that for this connection, a low profile Cinch connector part
DC-19678-3 is used in conjunction with two Cinch screw locks part D20419-21
to retain the backshell and connector.
75 ohm coaxial cable through the interface module - 75 ohm (HIM-75) module
mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the bottom cover.
135 ohm twisted pair cable through an HDSL line interface mounted on the
underside of the chassis, underneath the customer interface cover.
An adequate means should be provided for routeing E1/T1/HDSL link cables from and to
the M-Cellcity. To prevent the possibility of damage to exposed cables, Motorola
recommends that the E1/T1/HDSL link cables are routed inside a conduit.
NOTE
The ac power cable is to be routed to the M-Cellcity in a separate conduit.
140

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing E1/T1/HDSL link cabling

Introduction
This section describes the procedure for installing E1/T1/HDSL link cabling.
Refer to Antenna system for information on the antenna system and cabling guidelines.
Tools
S
Screwdriver set.
Ratchet with socket set.
Routeing the E1/T1/HDSL link to the wall bracket

To route the E1/T1/HDSL link to the wall bracket:
1.
Feed the E1/T1/HDSL link cable(s) through the conduit.
2.
Route the conduit from the E1/T1/HDSL link connection point to the wall bracket.
3.
Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket.

NOTE
The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottom of the wall
bracket.
It is assumed that cables to be used for the E1/T1/HDSL link are
pre-terminated with the appropriate connector.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
141
GSM-201-423
Installing the
M-Cellcity E1/T1
cable conduits
Figure 1-14 provides a view of the power and E1/T1 conduits, attached to the conduit
termination bracket.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT FOR E1/T1 CABLE(S)
NOTE: THE E1/T1 CABLES ARE NOT SHOWN
Figure 1-14 Attaching the conduits to the M-Cellcity conduit termination bracket
142

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing the
M-Cellcity+
E1/T1/HDSL
cable conduits
Figure 1-15 provides a view of the power and E1/T1/HDSL conduits, attached to the
conduit termination bracket.
WALL BRACKET
CONDUIT FOR E1/T1/HDSL CABLE(S)

NOTE: If HDSL LINKS ARE SELECTED, THEN IT IS NOT
POSSIBLE TO HAVE T1 LINKS WITH THIS COMBINATION.
THE E1/T1/HDSL CABLES ARE NOT SHOWN.
Figure 1-15 Attaching the conduits to the M-Cellcity+ conduit termination bracket
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
143
Final notes
GSM-201-423
Final notes
Final notes
This completes the site preparation procedure for M-Cellcity equipment. Once the site
has been prepared, the M-Cellcity equipment may be installed as described in Chapter 2.
NOTE
If the installation kit arrives separately, then those parts required after fitment
of the M-Cellcity chassis will need to be stored safely and securely.
144

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
Chapter 2
Installation
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
ii

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Chapter 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
22
22

24
24
24

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
27
28

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
210
211
212
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
213

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
216
216
217
217
219
221
221

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223
223
223
223
225

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
227
227
228
228
229
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
230
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
iii
GSM-201-423
iv

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Overview of installation
Introduction of
installation
This chapter provides the information required to install an M-Cellcity enclosure and its
internal and external interfaces.
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of
such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas.
Refer to site specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with
non-Motorola equipment.
Before starting an installation, prepare the site according to the description in Chapter 1
of this category and the site-specific documentation.
Installation steps
Installing the M-Cellcity equipment consists of the following procedures:
Procedure
Description
Unpacking the chassis equipment. Details the procedure for removing the chassis
from its packaging.
Fitting the battery.
The battery is packed separate from the chassis

and must be fitted after installation of the chassis.
Installing the chassis.
Details the procedure for installing the chassis onto

an existing wall bracket.
Connecting power, antenna,

E1/T1, HDSL and earth cables.
Details external cable connections.
Installing the solar cover.
Details the procedure for enclosing the chassis at

the completion of installation.
CAUTION
All site equipment associated with the M-Cellcity enclosure must be completely
installed before commissioning the equipment for operation.
E1/T1/HDSL link
testing
If a E1/T1/HDSL link has been provided, contact the local mobile switching centre (MSC)
and arrange, at the earliest opportunity, to test the line back to the MSC.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
21
GSM-201-423
Torque values
The following torque values are to be used when installing M-Cellcity equipment:
Wall bracket
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Chassis/wall bracket earth

stud
M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Factory & field
Wall bracket/wall fixings
M12 Hex.
Field only
Chassis
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Chassis earth stud
M8 Torx
10 Nm
Field only
Customer interface cover

(bottom cover)
M4 Torx
1.4 Nm
Factory & field
Security bracket/wall bracket

(top)
M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Field only
Chassis/wall bracket (bottom) M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Field only
Cover
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Solar cover/wall bracket

(security)
M6 Torx
10 Nm
Field only
Accessing the
equipment
WARNING
Observe all relevant safety requirements when working at height.
It is recommended that a suitable safety harness (EN355/European
Standard), attached to the cage of the hydraulic lift via a shock absorber, is
worn by all staff working at height.
Hydraulic lift
To access the equipment if mounted above ground/floor level, it is recommended that a
hydraulic lift is used. Consideration should be given to the required safe lifting capacity
of the hydraulic lift, allowing adequate capacity for two people with tools, plus the
equipment to be installed.
WARNING
The operating instructions for the hydraulic lift should be read before use, and
all applicable warnings and cautions should be observed.
22

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Scaffolding/platform
Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use scaffolding, with a
platform, to access the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift. Consideration
should be given to the required safe load-bearing capacity of the scaffolding, allowing
adequate capacity for two people with tools, plus the equipment to be installed.
WARNING
The scaffolding and platform should have a stabilizer fitted, which should be
used to keep the platform stable when in use.
Ladders
Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use a pair of ladders to
access the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift. Consideration should be given
to the required safe load-bearing capacity of the ladders, allowing adequate space for
two people with tools, plus the equipment to be installed.
WARNING
The ladders should be secured to keep them stable when in use.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
23
Equipment delivery and packaging
GSM-201-423

Equipment
delivery
Before the M-Cellcity equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate an area
at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also be suitable for
unpacking the equipment. Consult with the freight or moving company and the owners of
the building (if applicable) to select this area.
Chassis
equipment
The M-Cellcity chassis is delivered pre-configured, and is ready to be installed and
connected.
M-Cellcity chassis equipment comprises:
S
Chassis, with the following equipment fitted:
ac-dc PSM module.
dc-dc PSM module.
MCU-m module.
TCU-m modules.
All necessary fixing bolts.
The M-Cellcity chassis is packed in a polythene protective barrier bag during shipping
and storage. The barrier bag and desiccant are returned after unpacking the chassis for
reuse/recycling.
The M-Cellcity chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The
contents of the container is shown in Figure 2-1.
The M-Cellcity+ chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The
contents of the container is shown in Figure 2-2.
24

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Figure 2-1 M-Cellcity chassis and shipping container
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
25
GSM-201-423
Figure 2-2 M-Cellcity+ chassis and shipping container
26

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Unpacking the chassis equipment

Introduction
The following describes the procedure for dismantling the shipping container and
unpacking the M-Cellcity chassis. See Equipment delivery and packaging for
packaging details, including a list of the chassis equipment.
Tools required
This procedure requires a knife.
Unpacking the
equipment
WARNING
A packaged M-Cellcity chassis can weigh up to 40 kg.
Observe normal handling precautions when lifting and carrying.
CAUTION
Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched or damaged in any way
during this procedure.
To remove the chassis from the crate:
CAUTION
To avoid the possibility of unnecessary exposure to rain, it is recommended
that the chassis is not removed from the protective barrier bag until the
equipment is ready to be installed.
1.
Open the top of the cardboard container.
2.
Remove the protective packaging from the top of the chassis.
3.
Is mechanical lifting available:

Then ...
If ...
15th May 98
Not
Proceed with steps 4, 5, 6 and 8
Yes
Proceed with steps 6, 7 and 8
4.
Carefully place the cardboard container on its back (not on its side).
5.
Carefully slide the chassis out of the container.
6.
Cut open the sealed environmental bag containing the chassis, taking care not to
damage the equipment in any way.
7.
Lift the chassis out of the container.
8.
Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage
to the transport company.

68P02901W98-A
27
GSM-201-423
Disposing of the
packing material
To dispose of the packing material:
28
1.
Put the protective packaging back in the shipping container.
2.
Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country Project Manager.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing the M-Cellcity chassis

Introduction
This procedure provides instructions for installing the M-Cellcity chassis onto the wall
bracket.
NOTE
In certain cases it may be desirable to allocate wall mounting space prior to
full installation of the M-Cellcity. This may be achieved by securing the wall
bracket to the designated wall and then attaching the solar cover to the wall
bracket.
CAUTION
Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using a torque wrench.
The torque values are provided in Overview.
Tools and
equipment
S
Screwdriver set.
Ratchet, with 1/4 in socket to fit 5 mm tool bit.
Torque wrench.
This procedure requires the following items from the installation kit, Carton A:
15th May 98
Security plate.
Four M8 security bolts.
5 mm Hex tamperproof bit.
Two rubber insert washers.

68P02901W98-A
29
GSM-201-423
Installing the
chassis onto the
wall bracket
To install the M-Cellcity chassis:
NOTE
This procedure assumes a hydraulic lift is used to access the installation point
if above ground/floor level, but can be adapted to suit the appropriate method
according to local conditions.
Exercise great care when utilizing hydraulic lifting gear observe all instruction
and safety precautions.
If the installation is being carried out in a public area, a suitable area around
the site of the installation must be cordoned off to prevent members of the
public accessing the site.
If possible, a third member of the installation team should be stationed at the
site to ensure that the designated site area is not accessed by members of the
public.
WARNING
An equipped M-Cellcity chassis can weigh up to 30 kg.
Handle with extreme care. The M-Cellcity chassis requires a two person lift.
1.
Move the M-Cellcity chassis to the cage of the hydraulic lift.
2.
Collect the necessary tools and equipment, and enter the cage of the hydraulic lift.
3.
Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the
installation point on the wall, so that the M-Cellcity chassis is as close as possible
to the wall bracket.
4.
Supporting the weight of the M-Cellcity chassis, align and locate the the lugs on
either side of the chassis onto the two forks on either side of the wall bracket.
5.
Using the 5 mm Hex tamperproof bit, remove the three bolts securing the
carrying/lifting handle to the top of the chassis. Remove the handle and store for
future use.
6.
Fit the security plate, and secure, using the three bolts removed in step 5.
7.
Secure the security plate to the top of the wall bracket; using two M8 security
screws.
8.
Unscrew the 11 M4 screws (M-Cellcity) or 12 M4 screws (M-Cellcity+) around

the edge of the chassis bottom cover.
NOTE
The additional M4 screw in the (M-Cellcity+) is not in view and has to be
reached by a long screwdriver.
CAUTION
An environmental gasket seal is fitted between the bottom cover and the
bottom compartment. Take care to avoid damage to this gasket when
removing and refitting the chassis bottom cover.
210

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
9.
Carefully remove the chassis bottom cover from the bottom compartment, taking
care not to damage to the gasket seal.
10.
Using two M8 security screws with rubber insert washers threaded up under the
head; secure the bottom of the chassis to the wall bracket.
M-Cellcity
diagram
Figure 2-3 shows the M-Cellcity chassis, being installed onto the wall bracket.
SECURITY PLATE
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLE
Figure 2-3 Installing the M-Cellcity chassis
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
211
GSM-201-423
M-Cellcity+
diagram
Figure 2-4 shows the M-Cellcity+ chassis, being installed onto the wall bracket.
SECURITY PLATE
CARRYING/LIFTING HANDLE
Figure 2-4 Installing the M-Cellcity+ chassis

212

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Battery installation
Procedure
Perform the following procedure to install the battery into the chassis:
If...
Then...
M-Cellcity enclosure
Use steps 1 to 4 and 8.
M-Cellcity+ enclosure
Use steps 1 to 9.
1.
Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe out the inside of the bottom compartment to remove
any excess moisture, and wipe any excess moisture from the gasket seal around
the lower compartment.
2.
Unpack the battery from its protective wrapping and inspect for any damage.
See Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 for details of the battery and its
mounting position in the chassis.
3.
Insert blade fuse into holder on rear of battery pack.
4.
Position the battery in the chassis battery chamber, place retaining bar diagonally
across battery and push battery deeper into chamber. When the retaining bar is
below the fixing locations within the chamber, rotate the retaining bar to secure the
battery.
NOTE
When installing the battery on the M-Cellcity+, care must be taken not to
damage the battery on the side of the bracket holding the additional duplexer.
15th May 98
5.
Loosen the four M4 x 8 screws on the bracket assembly.
6.
Push the duplexer backwards away from the two front fixing positions and pull
forwards in order to create sufficient space for securing the battery connector.
7.
Position the battery cable and connector over the bracket edge, then position
battery cable in the recess of the bracket (see Figure 2-7).
8.
Place battery plug into connector socket and secure with captive screws.
9.
Replace duplexer over the two front fixing positions in the bracket assembly and
tighten the four M4 x 8 screws to secure the duplexer.

68P02901W98-A
213
GSM-201-423
Figure 2-5 Battery
BATTERY
BATTERY CONNECTOR
BATTERY RETAINING BAR
Figure 2-6 M-Cellcity battery location
214

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
BATTERY CONNECTOR
BATTERY

DUPLEXER ANTENNA CONNECTOR
DUPLEXER BRACKET
DUPLEXER BRACKET RECESS
M4 x 8 CROSS HEAD SCREW

(BACK FIXING POSITION)

(FRONT FIXING POSITION)
SIDE VIEW OF ONE DUPLEXER BRACKET
Figure 2-7 M-Cellcity+ battery connector and duplexer antenna location
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
215
Connecting external cables to the M-Cellcity enclosure
GSM-201-423

Introduction
The principal connections to be made when installing an M-Cellcity are:
S
AC mains power supply to the ac-dc PSM (Power Supply Module).
External antenna connection (if fitted).
BTS to BSC E1/T1 link.
Earth connections at the following points:
ac-dc PSM mains protective earth, connected along with line and neutral ac
power conductors to the 10 A IEC three pole socket which plugs into the
ac-dc PSM.
Wall mounting bracket earth/lightning protection M8 stud.
This section describes the procedure for connecting power and earth cabling to an
M-Cellcity.
WARNING
The M-Cellcity must be earthed with a conductor capable of carrying the full
fault current of the overcurrent protection device.
Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.
The ac input power connections must not be made at the main power source
at this time. The power-up procedure is part of the commissioning process
Tools
216
Screwdriver set.
Ratchet with 1/4 in socket.
T10 tamperproof bit.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Connecting the
ac power cable
WARNING
before proceeding.
To connect the ac power cable:
1.
Insert the ac power connector into the ac power socket of the ac-dc PSM; as
indicated in Figure 2-8.
2.
Using the T10 tamperproof bit, release the clamp, route and secure the power
cable to the position shown in Figure 2-8.
Connecting the
antenna cable
To connect the antenna:
M-Cellcity
If ...
Then ...
External antenna
Use step 1 and step 3.
Internal antenna (optional)
Use step 2 and step 3.
1.
Using the supplied antenna cable or direct link cable, ensure the antenna cable is
routed through the centre aperture of the conduit termination bracket.
2.
Secure the internal antenna to the front of the chassis and route the cable through
the front central aperture.
3.
Connect the N-type antenna plug to the antenna connector mounted on the
underside of the chassis; as shown in Figure 2-8 or Figure 2-9.
M-Cellcity+
15th May 98
1.
Using the first antenna cable or direct link cable, ensure the antenna cable is
routed through the centre aperture (chassis antenna connector) of the conduit
termination bracket.
2.
underside of the chassis; as shown in Figure 2-8 or Figure 2-9.
3.
Using the second antenna cable or direct link cable, ensure the antenna cable is
routed through the centre aperture (duplexer antenna connector) of the conduit
termination bracket and clamp in position.
4.
underside of the external duplexer; as shown in Figure 2-7.

68P02901W98-A
217
E1/T1 LINK
CONNECTOR(S)
T43 OR BIB
(T43 shown)
GSM-201-423
INTERNAL
ANTENNA CABLE
ENTRY
AC INPUT
CONNECTOR
EXERNAL
ANTENNA
CABLE ENTRY
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
POWER CABLE
CLAMP
E1/T1 CABLE(S)
CLAMP
Figure 2-8 View of underside of M-Cellcity chassis, showing cable connectors and
clamps
E1/T1 LINK
CONNECTOR(S)
(HIM-120 SHOWN)
AC INPUT
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
POWER CABLE
CLAMP
E1/T1 CABLE(S)
CLAMP
EXERNAL ANTENNA CABLE ENTRY
(CHASSIS ANTENNA CONNECTOR)
EXTERNAL ANTENNA CABLE ENTRY

(DUPLEXER ANTENNA CONNECTOR)
NOTE: EXTERNAL DUPLEXER NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
Figure 2-9 View of underside of M-Cellcity+ chassis, showing cable connectors

and clamps
218

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Connecting the
E1/T1 link to the
BIB or T43
NOTE
It is assumed that cables to be used for the E1/T1 link are pre-terminated
with the appropriate connector.
Figure 2-10 shows the BIB and T43 connectors. Table 2-1 and Table 2-2
show the interconnections.
To connect the E1/T1 link(s):
1.
What type of E1/T1 link is being used:

Then ...
If ...
2.
BIB module
Insert the 37 pin D-type connector into the socket J1 on the

BIB module.
T43 module
Insert the type 43 coaxial connectors into the appropriate

sockets on the T43 module.
Using the T10 tamperproof bit, release the clamp, route and secure the E1/T1
cable(s) to the position shown in Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9.
J0
J8
BIB
J14
J1
J4
J10
J16
J13
J2
J11
J7
T43
J17
J1
J5
J0
Figure 2-10 BIB/T43 line termination modules
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
219
GSM-201-423
Table 2-1 details the BIB interconnections used on the M-Cellcity:

Table 2-1 BIB module interconnections
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
J0-1
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Tx1+
J1-1
J0-20
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Tx1
J1-20
J0-2
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Rx1+
J1-2
J0-21
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Rx1
J1-21
J0-4
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Tx4+
J1-4
J0-23
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Tx4
J1-23
J0-5
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Rx4+
J1-5
J0-24
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA
_Rx4
J1-24
NOTES
Connector J0 and J1 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are connected to
ground.
Table 2-2 details the T43 interconnections used on the M-Cellcity:

Table 2-2 BIB module interconnections
Pin
no
Function
Pin no
Pin no
Function
Pin no
J0-1
MSI_MEGA_Tx1+
J1 Centre
J0-20
MSI_MEGA_Tx1
(ac coupled to Ground)
J1 Shield
J0-2
MSI_MEGA_Rx1+
J2 Centre
J0-21
MSI_MEGA_Rx1
(Ground)
J2 Shield
J0-4
MSI_MEGA_Tx4+
J4 Centre
J0-23
MSI_MEGA_Tx4
(ac coupled to Ground)
J4 Shield
J0-5
MSI_MEGA_Rx4+
J5 Centre
J0-24
MSI_MEGA_Rx4
(Ground)
J5 Shield
NOTES
Connector J0 pins 3, 6 to 19, 22 and 25 to 37 are not used
220

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Connecting the
E1 link to the
HIM-75 or
HIM-120
NOTE
It is assumed that cables to be used for the E1 link are pre-terminated with
the appropriate connector.
Figure 2-13 shows the HIM-75 and HIM-120 connectors. Table 2-3 and
Table 2-4 show the interconnections.
To connect the E1 link:
1.
What type of E1 link is being used:

If ...
2.
Then ...
HIM-75
connectors
Insert the type 43 coaxial connectors into the appropriate

sockets on the HIM-75 module.
HIM-120
connection
Insert the 37 pin D-type connector into the socket J1 on the

HIM-120 module.
Using the T10 tamperproof bit, release the clamp, route and secure the E1
cable(s) to the position shown in Figure 2-9.
Connecting
earth straps
The main site earth is connected to the wall bracket prior to installing the chassis. Once
the chassis has been installed, an earth strap must be installed between the main site
earth stud on the wall bracket and the earth stud on the ac-dc PSM.
CAUTION
All earth strap connections must be secured between two captive star
washers on each earth stud.
Main site earth (lightning protection earth)

The main site earth cable, serving as the lightning protection earth, is connected to the
M8 threaded earthing stud on the wall bracket. The main earth connection point on the
chassis is an M8 threaded earth stud on the bottom of the chassis. Once the chassis is
installed on the wall bracket, the main earth stud on the chassis is connected to the earth
stud on the wall bracket and to the earth stud on the ac-dc PSM, by installing earth
straps between these three points as shown in Figure 2-11.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
221
GSM-201-423
Safety earth
The mains supply (safety) earth is connected via the green/yellow conductor of the ac
power supply cable to the ac-dc PSM. This earth point is bonded to the main site earth
on the chassis by installing an earth strap between the ac-dc PSM and the chassis main
earth point.
The following diagrams show the location and views of the main earth points:
CHASSIS
EARTH
AC-DC PSM
EARTH
WALL BRACKET
EARTH
Figure 2-11 M-Cellcity main earth points
CHASSIS
EARTH
AC-DC PSM
EARTH
WALL BRACKET
EARTH
Figure 2-12 M-Celcity+ main earth points
222

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing HDSL links

Introduction
This procedure provides instructions for installing HDSL links.
Tools and
equipment
S
Screwdriver set.
Connecting the
HDSL links
NOTE
It is assumed that cables to be used for the HDSL are preterminated to the
appropriate 9-way D connector,
Figure 2-13 shows the underside view of the chassis with J3 and J6 link
connectors (HIM-75 board), and the underside view of the chassis with J3 and
J6 link connectors (HIM-120 board). Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 show the
interconnections.
To connect the J3 and J6 links (HIM-75 or HIM-120 board):
1.
Insert the appropriate 9 pin D-type connector(s) into the J6 socket (slave) and/or
J3 socket (master) on the HIM-75 module or HIM-120 board
2.
Using the appropriate screwdriver, secure the 9 pin D-type connector(s) to the
appropriate module.
Diagram
The following diagram shows the line termination modules.
J0
J5
HIM-120
J2
J4
J11
J3
J1
J8
J6
J10
J7
J1
HIM-75
J0
J6
J3
Figure 2-13 HIM line termination modules
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
223
GSM-201-423
Table 2-3 details the HIM-120 module interconnections used:

Table 2-3 HIM-120 module interconnections
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
J0-1
EQUIPMENT/EXT_Tx1+
J1-1
J0-20 EQUIPMENT/EXT_Tx1
J1-20
J0-2
EQUIPMENT/EXT_Rx1+
J1-2
J0-21 EQUIPMENT/EXT_Rx1
J1-21
J0-4
EQUIPMENT/EXT_Tx2+
J1-4
J0-23 EQUIPMENT/EXT_Tx2
J1-23
J0-5
EQUIPMENT/EXT_Rx2+
J1-5
J0-24 EQUIPMENT/EXT_Rx2
J1-24
J0-13
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1A+
J3-9
J0-32 HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1A
J3-4
J0-14
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1B+
J3-6
J0-33 HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1B
J3-1
J0-16
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 2A+
J6-9
J6-4
J0-17
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 2B+
J6-6
J6-1
NOTES
Connector J0 and J1 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19 are connected to earth; 22,
25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are ac coupled to earth.
Connectors J3 and J6 pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 8 are connected to earth.
Table 2-4 details the HIM-75 module interconnections used:
Table 2-4 HIM-120 module interconnections
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
Pin
no
Function
Pin
no
J0-1
EQUIPMENT_Tx1+
J1
J0-20 EQUIPMENT_Tx1
(ac coupled to earth)
Centre
J1
Shield
J0-2
EQUIPMENT_Rx1+
J2
J0-21 EQUIPMENT_Rx1
Centre
(earth)
J2
Shield
J0-4
EQUIPMENT_Tx2+
J4
J0-23 EQUIPMENT_Tx2
Centre
(ac coupled to earth)
J4
Shield
J0-5
EQUIPMENT_Rx2+
J5
J0-24 EQUIPMENT_Rx2
Centre
(earth)
J5
Shield
J0-13
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1A+
J3-9
J3-4
J0-14
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 1B+
J3-6
J3-1
J0-16
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 2A+
J6-9
J6-4
J0-17
HDSL_EQUIP/EXT 2B+
J6-6
J6-1
NOTES
Connector J0 pins 3, 6 to 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25 to 31, 34 and 37 are not used.
Connectors J3 and J6 pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 8 are connected to earth.
224

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
HDSL link
options
The M-Cellcity and the M-Cellcity+ BTS have a maximum of two 2.048 Mbit/s links. If
the HDSL equipped version is purchased the links are automatically configured as either
E1 or HDSL via a combination of database settings and auto-detection mechanisms.
The setting of master/slave defaults can be changed by database settings for those
scenarios, such as a closed loop daisy chain, where the defaults are not appropriate.
Links can be either E1 or HDSL, and can be mixed as appropriate within the network.
The three link options available are:
S
Daisy chain.
Star configuration.
E1 link.
Daisy chain
In the first configuration a Base Station Controller (BSC) connects to an external modem
through an E1 link. A connection is then made from the external modem slave port to the
J3 master port on the M-Cellcity+ (HIM-75 or HIM-120 board). The J6 slave port of the
M-Cellcity+ connects to the next M-Cellcity+ J3 master port and so on, until the last
M-Cellcity+ port is connected.
E1 LINK
HDSL
SLAVE
EXTERNAL
MODEM
HDSL
M-Cellcity+
HDSL
M-Cellcity+
M-Cellcity+
BSC
M =
15th May 98
MASTER
S = SLAVE

68P02901W98-A
225
GSM-201-423
Star configuration
In the second configuration a BSC is again connected to an external modem through an
E1 link. A connection is then made from the external modem slave port to the J3 master
port of the M-Cellcity+ (HIM-75 or HIM-120 board). In this configuration an external
modem is used every time a single M-Cellcity+ is used, hence the star formation.
E1 LINK
HDSL
SLAVE
EXTERNAL
MODEM
E1 LINK
M-Cellcity+
HDSL
SLAVE
EXTERNAL
MODEM
E1 LINK
HDSL
SLAVE
EXTERNAL
MODEM
BSC
M =
M-Cellcity+
M-Cellcity+
MASTER
E1 link option
In the third configuration an E1 link is used from the BSC to the first M-Cellcity+. Here
the connection is made to the J1 port in the HIM-120 board or to one of the coaxial cable
connectors on the HIM-75 board (see also the interconnection tables above), from there
onwards HDSL links are used running from slave port (J6) to master port (J3) in each
M-Cellcity+.
E1 LINK
S
M-Cellcity+
HDSL
M-Cellcity+
HDSL
M-Cellcity+
BSC
M =
226
MASTER
S = SLAVE

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Installing the solar cover

Introduction
This procedure provides instructions for installing the solar cover onto the wall bracket.
NOTE
On certain cases it may be desirable to allocate wall mounting space prior to
full installation of an M-Cellcity chassis. This is achieved by securing the
wall bracket to the designated wall and then attaching the solar cover to the
wall bracket.
CAUTION
Screws should be tightened to the specified torque for the screw size using
a torque wrench. The torque values are given in the installation Overview.
NOTE
Motorola recommend the use of M6 security screws for the installations
described in this section.
Tools and
equipment
S
Ratchet, with 1/4 in socket to fit 4 mm tool bit.
Torque wrench.
This procedure requires the following items; from the installation kit (retained during
installation of wall bracket), Carton A:
15th May 98
Four M6 security screws.
Four plastic bungs.
Solar cover; from the installation kit, Carton C.

68P02901W98-A
227
GSM-201-423
Fitting the solar

cover
To fit the solar cover to the wall bracket:
1.
Position the solar cover over the chassis.
2.
Align the two channels at each side of the solar cover with the chassis locating
lugs on the sides of the chassis.
3.
Push the solar cover towards the wall, and downwards, until it is positioned on the
chassis locating lugs.
4.
Insert the two M6 security screws at each side, and secure the solar cover loosely
5.
Tighten the M6 security screws evenly to the specified torque (10 Nm).
6.
Fit a plastic bung in each of the four security screw holes in the solar cover.
M-Cellcity
diagram
Figure 2-14 shows the M-Cellcity solar cover to be mounted onto the walll bracket:
Figure 2-14 Installing the M-Cellcity solar cover

228

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
M-Cellcity+
diagram
Figure 2-15 shows the M-Cellcity+ solar cover to be mounted onto the walll bracket:
Figure 2-15 Installing the M-Cellcity+ solar cover
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
229
Final notes
GSM-201-423
Final notes
Final notes
This completes the installation and connection of the M-Cellcity chassis and associated
equipment. The M-Cellcity may now be commissioned, as described in Chapter 3.
230

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
Chapter 3
Commissioning
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
ii

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Chapter 3
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
34
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
35

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
37
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
iii
GSM-201-423
iv

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Overview of commissioning
Overview of commissioning
Introduction to
commissioning
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of an M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+ enclosure. It contains only the powering-up sequence.
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
For information on configuration, optimization and GSM/EGSM channel
numbers,frequencies and calibration procedures consult Installation and
Configuration: BSS Optimization (GSM-100-423).
Before starting the commissioning, the site should be prepared as detailed in Chapter 1
of this Category 423 and the site specific documentation; and the equipment installed as
Commissioning of an M-Cellcity enclosure consists of the following sections:
Section
15th May 98
Description
Test equipment & test leads.
Details of test equipment.
Preparing for commissioning.
Pre-commissioning steps.
Pre-powerup checks
Steps to perform before powering up the system.
Powering up the equipment.
Details the correct power up sequence.

68P02901W98-A
31
Test equipment and test leads
GSM-201-423

Introduction
The test equipment listed in Table 3-1 is required to carry out the commissioning tests in
this chapter.
Calibrate all test leads before using them in the procedures given in this chapter. This
minimizes variations in test results.
CAUTION
A recognised laboratory must calibrate all test equipment annually. Do not
calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field.
Ensure that all test equipment associated with commissioning of Motorola
Cellular Base Stations is within calibration date.
32

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Test equipment
Table 3-1 Required commissioning test equipment
Quantity
1
15th May 98
Description
IBM compatible 486 DX2 or DX4
portable Personal Computer (PC).
Comments
The basic requirements are:
S
TFT colour screen.
S
170 Mbyte hard drive

(minimum).
Minimum 4 Mbyte RAM

(minimum) or 8 Mbyte
(recommended).
3.5 inch floppy drive.
Serial port.
CD-ROM drive
(recommended).
PCMCIA (Type 2)
compatible slot.
Windows 3.1 loaded and

running in 386 enhanced
mode.
Battery power.
Signal generator
Rubidium standard
Frequency counter
Commercial terminal emulator

software
PC PLUS or similar software
Digital multimeter
Hewlett Packard E2378A or

equivalent
RF 50 ohm dummy load
50 W minimum
Transportable cellphone
ESD protection kit
RF adaptor kit
N to 7/16 adaptor
N to N adaptor
RF wattmeter with 5W, 10 W, 25 W Bird model 43P or equivalent

and 50 W elements
2 metre N to N male coaxial cable
Must be calibrated
4 metre N to N male coaxial cable
Must be calibrated
9 way to 37 way cable
TTY cable
HIM-75 (Type 43) loop-back

cables, 9 inches (23 cm) long
HIM-120 loop-back plug
Minimum accuracy 1 x 1010
RTLXQ98088 or equivalent

68P02901W98-A
33
GSM-201-423
Test cable
The test cable mentioned in Table 3-1 is detailed in Figure 3-1.
MMI_TXD 2
MMI_RXD 3
MMI_RXD
MMI_TXD
GROUND 5
GROUND
8
|
37
(9 way)
(37 way)
Figure 3-1 9 way to 37 way cable
34

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Pre-powerup checks
Pre-powerup checks
Introduction
WARNING
Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in this
section must be performed.
Only insulated tools should be used when working on the M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+ power system.
This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying power to
an M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ enclosure.
CAUTION
This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable to static discharge.
Although the damage may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may
be damaged in the long term due to mishandling causing barrier breakdown.
Earth continuity
checks
Before proceeding with the earth continuity checks, ensure the following earth
connections are in place and secure:
S
System main earth to site main earth.
ac-dc PSM safety earth to system earth.
dc-dc PSM safety earth to ac power safety earth.
Check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Inspecting the
system visually
Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition <Section
711, 712 and 713>) or the IEC Wiring regulations equivalent.
WARNING
If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, the commissioning must
not proceed further until the damage has been inspected and rectified by the
manufacturers or their representatives.
Equipment interior and exterior

Examine the exterior of the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ enclosure for structural, paint or
mechanical damage, and report any damage to manufacturers for repair as detailed in
Category 523 Maintenance Information of this Service Manual.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
35
Pre-powerup checks
GSM-201-423
Power system
Examine the power system for mechanical damage and report any damage to
manufacturers for repair as detailed in Category 523 Maintenance Information of this
Service Manual.
This procedure is performed to establish whether the power system is showing any
outward signs of malfunction such as blackening of any components (indicating
excessive heat build up) and identification of any loose connectors.
To perform a visual inspection of the power system:
WARNING
Potential lethal voltages, up to 230 V ac, and high energy sources are present
within the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ when the ac mains isolator switch is set
to the ON position and/or the battery is connected.
Ensure the main ac power isolator is in the OFF position before proceeding.
36
1.
Check system earth connections for tightness and cable/strap damage.
2.
Check the protective earth to the ac-dc PSM.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Powering-up the equipment

Introduction
This section provides the procedure to be followed when initially powering up an
M-Cellcity enclosure.
WARNING
Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in
Pre-power up checks must be performed.
Only insulated tools should be used when working on the power system.
Initial powering
up the equipment
To power-up a M-Cellcity:
1.
Ensure the battery is NOT connected before powering up.
2.
Operate the mains ac power isolator to connect the ac supply to the ac-dc PSM.
3.
Check with the OMC that the M-Cellcity is working.
4.
Switch off the mains ac power at the isolator.
The procedure is now complete.

NOTE
For further testing, It is recommended that once the system powered-up, the
installer should move on to the other configuration and optimization tests in
order to allow time for the battery to be fully charged before performing the
battery test, consult Installation and Configuration: BSS Optimization
(GSM-100-423).
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
37
38
GSM-201-423

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
Chapter 4
Decommissioning the equipment
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
ii

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Chapter 4
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
46
47
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
iii
GSM-201-423
iv

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
Overview of decommissioning
Overview of decommissioning
Introduction to
decommission
This chapter describes how to decommission an M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ enclosure.
To decommission equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example E1/T1/HDSL Links,
power supplies and antenna, refer to the vendors instructions.
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc and 230 V ac exist inside an
Use extreme caution when working on an M-Cellcity enclosure with power
applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.
Prerequisite
Read Chapter 1 of this category before attempting to decommission an M-Cellcity
enclosure.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
41
Decommissioning a M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure
GSM-201-423

Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission an M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure, and
use the checklist to check off each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as
often as required; do not write on the original.
Before starting
Before starting to decommission an M-Cellcity enclosure ensure that:
S
The main power source is switched off and that no power is connected to the
enclosure.
Sufficient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissioned equipment.
Procedure
To decommission an M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure:
1.
Check the enclosure for signs of damage.
2.
Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present to the enclosure.
3.
Remove the solar cover:

Step
4.
42
Action
a.
Using a flat bladed screwdriver, carefully remove the two plastic bungs
from each side of the solar cover.
b.
Remove the two M6 security screws from each side of the solar cover.
c.
Pull the solar cover away from the wall mounting bracket, and upwards,
until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.
Carefully pack the solar cover in carton C provided:

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
5.
Remove the battery:

If...
Then...
Use steps a to e (M-Cellcity).
Use steps a to g (M-Cellcity+).
Action (M-Cellcity)
Step
a.
Remove the 11 M4 screws retaining the chassis bottom cover.
b.
Carefully remove the bottom cover.
c.
Release the two retaining screws and disconnect the battery flying lead
from the battery connector mounted on the underside of the chassis.
d.
Release and turn the battery retaining bar through 90 and remove the
battery.
e.
Remove blade fuse from battery.

Action (M-Cellcity+)
Step
6.
a.
Remove the 12 M4 (M-Cellcity+) screws retaining the chassis bottom

cover. Note: The additional M4 screw in the M-Cellcity+ is not in view
and has to be reached by a long screwdriver.
b.
Carefully remove the bottom cover.
c.
Loosen the four M4 x 8 screws on the bracket assembly.
d.
Push the duplexer backwards from the two front fixing positions and pull
forwards in order to create sufficient space for releasing the battery
connector.
e.
Release the two captive screws and disconnect the battery flying lead
from the battery connector mounted on the underside of the chassis.
f.
Release and turn the battery retaining bar through 90 and remove the
battery.
g.
Remove blade fuse from battery.
Carefully pack the battery and blade fuse in carton A provided.

CAUTION
An M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure uses circuitry which is sensitive to static
discharge. Avoid handling in a high-static environment. When handling the
chassis, do not touch connector contacts.
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
43
7.
GSM-201-423
Disconnect the ac input power cable, external antenna (if fitted), E1/T1/HDSL links
and earth cables.
If it is...
Then...
ac power
Disconnect the 10 A IEC three pole ac power

connector from the ac-dc PSM, by pulling, using the
connector body.
Using the T10 tamperproof bit, remove the cable
clamp, release the power cable and refit the cable
clamp.
Remote antenna
Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from the antenna

connector mounted on the underside of the chassis.
E1/T1/HDSL links
Disconnect the connections from the HIM-75 or

HIM-120 module:
a.If the module is a HIM-75 then release the Type 43
connectors.
b.If the module is a HIM-120 then release the two
retaining screws and remove the 37 way
D-type connector.
Using the T10 tamperproof bit, remove the cable
clamp, release the E1/T1/HDSL cable(s) and refit the
cable clamp.
Earth strap
Remove the nut, spring and plain washers; and

disconnect the earth strap from the wall mounting
bracket.
Wall bracket earth
Disconnect the main earth cable from the wall bracket.
WARNING
Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel
using the site.
8.
44
Ensure that all disconnected cables are clear of the enclosure.

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
9.
Remove the chassis:

WARNING
The chassis can weigh up to 32 kg. Handle with extreme caution.
Step
Action
a.
Remove the two M8 security screws, securing the bottom of the chassis
b.
Carefully fit the chassis bottom cover.
c.
Fit and tighten the 11 M4 screws (M-Cellcity) or 12 M4 (M-Cellcity+)

screws retaining the chassis bottom cover. The additional M4 screw in
the M-Cellcity+ is not in view and has to be secured by means of a long
screwdriver.
d.
Remove the two M8 security bolts, securing the security plate to the top
of the chassis to the top of the wall bracket.
e.
Using the 5 mm Hex tamperproof bit, remove the three bolts securing
the security plate to the top of the chassis.
f.
Remove the security plate and pack in carton A provided.
g.
Using the three M8 bolts, removed in step e; locate, and fit, the
previously stored carrying/lifting handle to the top of the chassis.
h.
Using the carrying/lifting handle and supporting the weight of the

chassis, lift and pull the chassis away from the wall bracket.
10.
Carefully pack the chassis in the shipping container provided.
11.
Remove the wall bracket:

Then ...
If it is ...
Wall mounted
Holding the wall bracket, and using a suitable tool remove

the four screws securing the wall bracket to the wall.
Pole mounted
Using suitable tools, cut and remove the lower bucklestrap

from the pole.
Holding the wall bracket, and using the above procedure,
remove the upper bucklestrap from the pole.
Remove the wall bracket from the pole. Remove the two
C channels from the wall bracket.
Remove the two universal channel clamps from the
C channels.
15th May 98
12.
If fitted, remove the conduit termination bracket from both the conduits and wall
bracket.
13.
Carefully pack the wall bracket in the carton B provided.
14.
Carefully pack all security and fixing screws, nuts, washers and plastic bungs
together with the conduit termination bracket, two C channels, universal channel
clamps and bucklestraps; in carton A provided.
15.
Carefully pack cartons C, B and A in the shipping container provided.
16.
Seal both shipping containers; and return as advised by the Motorola in-country
Project Manager.

68P02901W98-A
45
GSM-201-423
M-Cellcity
enclosure
checklist
ENGINEERS NAME
DATE
SIGNATURE
SITE NAME
EQUIPMENT TYPE
NAT ID
ACTION
YES
NO
N/A
M-Celerity decommissioned
Packing material (including polythene bag) on site
Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box.
Solar cover removed and packed
Battery removed and packed.
AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM
T43/BIB disconnected
Remote antenna disconnected (if fitted)
Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket
Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket
M-Cellcity chassis removed and packed
Wall bracket removed and packed
Wall bracket fixings removed and packed
Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed and packed
All loose cables stowed and secured
COMMENTS
46

68P02901W98-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-423
M-Cellcity+
enclosure
checklist
ENGINEERS NAME
DATE
SIGNATURE
SITE NAME
EQUIPMENT TYPE
NAT ID
ACTION
YES
NO
N/A
M-Cellcity+ decommissioned
Packing material (including polythene bag) on site
Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box.
Solar cover removed and packed
Battery removed and packed.
AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM
HIM-75 or HIM-120 cables disconnected
Remote antenna disconnected (if fitted)
Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket
Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket
M-Cellcity chassis removed and packed
Wall bracket removed and packed
Wall bracket fixings removed and packed
Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed and packed
All loose cables stowed and secured
COMMENTS
15th May 98

68P02901W98-A
47
48

68P02901W98-A
GSM-201-423
15th May 98
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 3
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
CHAPTER 4
REPAIR
CHAPTER 4
REPAIR
CHAPTER 3
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
CHAPTER 2
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Category 523
Maintenance Information
15th May 98
Maintenance Information: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

68P02901W99-A
GSM-201-523
ii

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Category 523
Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
15
16
16
16
17
18
18
18
Chapter 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
24
25
26
26
26
26
Chapter 3
Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31
31
Chapter 4
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
41
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
iii
GSM-201-523
iv

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
43
43

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
48
49
410
410

411
411
412

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
Chapter 1
General information
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
GSM-201-523
ii

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Chapter 1
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
11
11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
12
12
12

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
15
16
16
16
17

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
18
18
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
iii
GSM-201-523
iv

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Overview of maintenance
Overview of maintenance
Introduction to
conditions and
requirements
This chapter contains the recommended conditions and requirements that should be
considered before any of the procedures included in this document, or referred to in other
documents, are carried out on the M-Cellcity equipment.
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
The conditions and requirements to be considered are:
S
Equipment access.
Tools and materials.
Test equipment and leads.

NOTE
Since M-Cellcity operates as part of a network, the procedures in this manual
must be performed in conjunction with the relevant network procedures
performed at the OMC.
Schedule
Routine maintenance is recommended at the following intervals:
Table 1-1 Routine maintenance schedule
6 months
12 months
24 months
Nil
Ensure that air inlet and exhaust

apertures are not blocked.
Nil
Nil
Cover cleaning
Nil
Routine
maintenance
procedures
The routine maintenance procedures are listed below, and detailed in the chapter that
follows.
S
Cover cleaning.
Cleaning of the inlet and outlet grilles.
Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal
hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these routine maintenance
procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working
on the equipment.
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
11
Equipment access
GSM-201-523
Equipment access
Introduction
The following information details the environmental requirements that should be
considered before attempting to gain access to M-Cellcity equipment.
Environmental
requirements
The environmental limits for equipment operation and maintenance activity are defined in
Technical Description: (Category 323).
Maintenance
conditions
Maintenance procedures depend on the ambient conditions.
Access to M-Cellcity equipment in the open air must not be attempted during the
following actual or imminent inclement weather conditions:
S
Winds in excess of 25 knots.
Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail, or sleet.
During an electrical storm.
The M-Cellcity equipment may be accessed under the following conditions:

S
Wind speeds of less than 25 knots.
No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.
When the temperature is between 40 _C to +50 _C.
Access to a wall
mounted
M-Cellcity
A hydraulic lift/ladders must be used to gain access to the M-Cellcity for repair and
routine maintenance.
12

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Tools and materials
Tools and materials

Introduction
The following tables list the recommended tools and materials for carrying out the
procedures in this manual.
Two general tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites.
Cellular tool kit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning.
A recommended M-Cellcity tool kit is listed in Table 1-4.
GSM cellular tool

kit number 1
Quantity
1 pair
Description
Safety goggles
Hard hat
Dust mask
1 pair
Ear defenders
Antistatic mat
Torch
5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in)
Padlock to fit cantilever tool box
Zipped tool case
Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive)
1 each
Combination spanners A/F:1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in,
5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 in and 1 in
3/4 in
Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in)
Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb)
Torx driver set (T10 to T30)
Allen key set A/F
Claw hammer
Pipe cutter

. . . continued
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
13
Tools and materials
GSM-201-523

Quantity
Description
Junior hacksaw
10
Replacement blades for junior hacksaw
300 mm hacksaw
10
Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw
1 pair
6 in side cutters
1 pair
6 in heavy-duty side cutters
1 pair
Wire cutters
1 pair
Cable shears
Knife with retractable blade
1 pair
8 in combination pliers
1 pair
General purpose pliers
1 pair
Snipe nose pliers
1 each
Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt
1 each
Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in
Set of jewellers screwdrivers
Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)
Transpower 110 V (twin outlet)
Kango 501 110 V
M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501
Piston drill P221 115V
24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in
110 V plugs
6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)
Soldering iron
Soldering iron stand
Hand crimp tool
Crimp tool for type 43 connectors
BNC crimp tool with inserts
Telephone plug crimp tool
50 mm crimp tool
Cable tie gun
4 ft wooden step ladder
Table vice
10 in vice grips
7.5 m tape measure

. . . continued
14

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Tools and materials

Quantity
Description
12 in steel rule
Spirit level (3 ft)
Centre punch
Pocket scriber
10 in half round file
GSM cellular tool

kit number 2
Quantity
15th May 98
Description
Antistatic mat
Marker pen
Zipped tool pack case
Large sectioned storage box
Torx driver set including sizes T10 and T30
1 pair
Flush cut wire cutters
1 pair
Light duty cable cutters
1 pair
Industrial scissors
1 pair
GP serrated jaw pliers
1 pair
Snipe nose pliers
1 pair
Straight point tweezers
Screw/nut driver set
Screw gripping driver
Null modem
RS232 mini tester
Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder
Cable tie gun
M to M gender changer
Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)

68P02901W99-A
15
Tools and materials
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity tool
kit
The following table lists the contents of the M-Cellcity tool kit.
Table 1-4 M-Cellcity tool kit
Quantity
Description
2 1/4 in flat bladed screwdriver
1/4 in square drive
13 mm socket (long)
7 mm socket (long)
6 mm socket (long)
5.5 mm socket (long)
Universal joint
1/4 in to hex adaptor
T20 tamperproof bit
T10 tamperproof bit
Additional
equipment
The following table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number three, which is specific to
M-Cellcity equipment:
Table 1-5 Additional equipment
Quantity
1
Description
AC power generator for power tools
Materials
Table 1-6 lists the recommended materials used in the procedures in this manual:
Table 1-6 Materials
Quantity
1
16
Description
Lubricant WD40

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Tools and materials
Torque values
The following torque values are to be used when performing maintenance on M-Cellcity
equipment:
Wall bracket
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Chassis/wall bracket earth

stud
M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Factory & field
Wall bracket/wall fixings
M12 Hex.
Field only
Chassis
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Chassis earth stud
M8 Torx
10 Nm
Field only
Customer interface cover

(bottom cover)
M4 Torx
1.4 Nm
Factory & field
Security bracket/wall bracket

(top)
M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Field only
Chassis/wall bracket (bottom) M8 Hex.
10 Nm
Field only
Cover
15th May 98
Part
Size/Type
Torque
Where
Solar cover/wall bracket

(security)
M6 Torx
10 Nm
Field only

68P02901W99-A
17
Test equipment and leads
GSM-201-523
Test equipment and leads

Introduction
The following list details the recommended tools and cleaning agents required for the
repair and routine maintenance for carrying out all the procedures included in this
manual.
Tools and
cleaning agents
Following is list of tools and cleaning agents:
18
Dustpan.
Soft brush.
Mild detergent.
De-ionized water.
Leather cloth.

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
Chapter 2
Routine maintenance
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
GSM-201-523
ii

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Chapter 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
22
22
23
24
25

26
26
26
26
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
iii
GSM-201-523
iv

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Overview
Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides the information required to perform the routine maintenance on an
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
Since an M-Cellcity BTS operates as part of a network, the procedures in this
manual must be performed in conjunction with the relevant network
procedures performed at the OMC.
Maintenance
procedures
The M-Cellcity routine maintenance procedures which should be performed annually
are:
S
Security of attachment.
Cleaning the cover inlet and outlet apertures.
Torque values
For torque values used during the performance of routine maintenance on M-Cellcity
equipment, refer to Chapter 1.
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
21
Removing the solar cover
GSM-201-523

Introduction
This procedure describes how to remove the solar cover to gain access to internal
components, and refit it when maintenance has been completed.
CAUTION
Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be
considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
Tools
The tools specifically required for these procedures are:
S
2 1/4 in flat bladed screwdriver.
Torque wrench.
Removing the
solar cover
To remove the solar cover:
1.
Using the flat bladed screwdriver, carefully remove the two plastic bungs from
each side of the solar cover.
2.
3.
Pull the solar cover away from the wall bracket, and upwards, until it is free from
the chassis locating lugs.
CAUTION
Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of the solar cover, as it is
susceptible to damage.
4.
Remove the solar cover and inspect for damage .

NOTE
If damaged, a new solar cover should be ordered (see Parts Information,
Category 623).
5.
22
Place solar cover in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity
diagram
Figure 2-1 shows the removal of the solar cover from the wall bracket:
BUNGS WITH FIXING SCREWS

CONCEALED UNDERNEATH
SOLAR COVER
Figure 2-1 Removing the solar cover from the wall bracket
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
23
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity+
diagram
Figure 2-2 shows the removal of the solar cover from the wall bracket:

SOLAR COVER
24

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Refitting the
solar cover
To refit the solar cover:
15th May 98
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

68P02901W99-A
25
Annual routine maintenance
GSM-201-523
Annual routine maintenance

Maintenance
overview
This section describes the routine maintenance procedures which should be performed in
the sequence documented.
Cleaning
equipment
The following cleaning equipment and materials are required for the routine maintenance
S
Soft brush.
Dustpan.
Mild detergent.
De-ionized water
Leather cloth.
Maintenance
procedure
With the solar cover removed, inspect security of attachment and remove all the dirt and
windborne debris from the finned surfaces of the equipment as follows:
Security of attachment
Check all visible nuts, bolts, screws and connections for security of attachment, refer to
the torque tables in Chapter 1.
Cleaning the cover, inlet and outlet apertures
26
1.
Clean the solar cover using a leather cloth, mild detergent and water to remove
any grease, salt or bird lime.
2.
Using a soft brush and dustpan remove all the dirt and debris from the inlet and
outlet apertures (finned surfaces) of the equipment.
3.
Refit the solar cover.

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
Chapter 3
Fault diagnosis
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
GSM-201-523
ii

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Chapter 3
Fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31
31
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
iii
GSM-201-523
iv

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Overview of fault diagnosis

References for
fault diagnosis
There are no fault diagnosis procedures described in this manual for the M-Cellcity
equipment. Reference should be made to the following manuals:
15th May 98
Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC (GSM-100-501)
Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM-100-523).

68P02901W99-A
31
32
GSM-201-523

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
Chapter 4
Repair
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
GSM-201-523
ii

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Chapter 4
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
41

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
42
42
43
43

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
48
49
410
410

411
411
412
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
iii
GSM-201-523
iv

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Overview
Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides the information required to replace the Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs) units contained inside the M-Cellcity. Only components classed as FRUs are
detailed in this chapter.
NOTE
M-Cellcity+.
Field
Replaceable
Units (FRU)
Field Replaceable Units (FRU) are:
S
M-Cellcity solar cover.
M-Cellcity enclosure complete.
Backup battery.
Torque values
For torque values used during the performance of the repair procedures on M-Cellcity
equipment, refer to Chapter 1.
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
41
Replacing an M-Cellcity solar cover
GSM-201-523

Introduction
This procedure describes how to remove the M-Cellcity solar cover, and replace with a
new unit.
WARNING
In order to eliminate RF exposure from the antenna, power to the transceivers
must be turned OFF while connections are made to the M-Cellcity.
Notify the OMC to power-down the transceivers.
CAUTION
Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 of this category for the conditions
that must be considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
NOTE
When a replacement solar cover is ordered, only the M-Cellcity+ cover style
will be despatched. This cover is suitable for the M-Cellcity enclosure.
Tools required
S
Ratchet, with 1/4 socket.
4 mm hex tamperproof bit.
Screwdriver.
Removing the
solar cover
1.
Carefully remove the two plastic bungs from each side of the solar cover.
2.
3.
Pull the cover away from the wall bracket, and upwards, until it is free from the
chassis lugs.
CAUTION
42
4.
Remove the solar cover.
5.
Locate, and fit, the previously stored carrying/lifting handle to the top of the
chassis, using the three M8 bolts removed in step 4.
6.
Using the carrying/lifting handle and supporting the weight of the chassis, lift and
pull away from the wall bracket.
68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Fitting the new

solar cover
To fit the new solar cover (M-Cellcity+ style) to the wall bracket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NOTE
The OMC can now be instructed to power-up the transceivers.
M-Cellcity+
diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the M-Cellcity+ solar cover to be mounted onto the walll bracket:
Figure 4-1 Fitting the new M-Cellcity+ solar cover
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
43
Replacing an M-Cellcity enclosure
GSM-201-523

Introduction
This procedure describes how to remove the M-Cellcity, and replace with a new unit.
WARNING
Notify the OMC, and isolate the unit from the ac mains before carrying out this
procedure. Ensure that the battery has gone flat.
CAUTION
Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for the conditions that must be
considered before gaining access to internal equipment.
Tools required
S
Ratchet, with 1/4 socket.
4 mm hex tamperproof bit.
Screwdriver.
Removal
procedures
Before the equipment is removed from the bracket the following procedures must be
performed:
S
Solar cover removal.
Battery disconnection.
Cable disconnection.
Removing the
solar cover
1.
Carefully remove the two plastic bungs from each side of the solar cover.
2.
3.
Pull the cover away from the wall bracket, and upwards, until it is free from the
chassis lugs.
CAUTION
4.
44
Remove the solar cover and put in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity
diagram
Figure 4-2 shows the location of the solar cover on the wall bracket:

SOLAR COVER
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
45
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity+
diagram
Figure 4-3 shows the location of the solar cover on the wall bracket:

SOLAR COVER
46

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Removing the
battery
With reference to Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 in order to remove the battery:
1.
If...
Then...
Use steps 1 , 2 , 5 and 6.
Use steps 1 to 6.
Remove the 11 M4 bolts (M-Cellcity) or 12 M4 bolts (M-Cellcity+) retaining the

chassis bottom cover.
NOTE
The additional M4 bolt in the M-Cellcity+ is not in view and has to be reached
by a long screwdriver.
2.
Carefully remove the chassis bottom cover.
3.
Loosen the four M4 x 8 screws on the duplexer bracket assembly.
4.
Push the duplexer backwards away from the two front fixing positions and pull
forwards in order to create sufficient space for releasing the battery connector.
5.
Disconnect the battery flying lead.
6.
Release and turn the battery retaining bar through 90 and remove the battery.
Cable
disconnection
With reference to Figure 4-4; disconnect the following cables:
AC power
WARNING
before proceeding.
Disconnect the 10 A IEC three pole ac power connector from the ac-dc PSM, by pulling
on the connector body.
Antenna
Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from the antenna connector mounted on the
underside of the chassis.
E1/T1/HDSL link
Disconnect the connections from the HIM-75/T43 or HIM-120/BIB module:
If the module is ...
15th May 98
Then ...
HIM-75/T43
Release the type T43 connectors.
HIM-120/BIB
Release the two retaining screws and remove the 37-way D

type connector.

68P02901W99-A
47
GSM-201-523
Earth bar
Remove the nut, spring and plain washers; and disconnect the earth bar from the wall
mounting bracket.
M-Cellcity
diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the cables to be removed:
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
E1/T1 LINKS
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKET EARTH STUD
AC INPUT
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
BATTERY
Figure 4-4 View of underside of M-Cellcity chassis, detailing cable connectors
48

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity+
diagram
The following diagram shows the location of the cables to be removed:
E1/T1/HIM-75/HIM-120 LINKS
(HIM-120 shown)
DUPLEXER BRACKET
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKET EARTH STUD
BATTERY CONNECTOR
BATTERY
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
DUPLEXER BRACKET
AC INPUT CONNECTOR
(UNDER DUPLEXER)
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
(UNDER DUPLEXER)


Figure 4-5 View of underside of M-Cellcity+ chassis, detailing cable connectors
15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
49
GSM-201-523
M-Cellcity and
M-Cellcity+
removal from
wall bracket
The following procedure assumes that a hydraulic lift is to be used in the replacement of
an M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+.
To remove the enclosure:
NOTE
It is assumed that the Removing the solar cover, Removing the battery and
Cable disconnection procedures have been carried out, the chassis bottom
cover is therefore removed.
1.
Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to the
enclosure.
2.
Remove the two M8 security bolts, securing the bottom of the chassis to the wall
bracket.
3.
Remove the two M8 security bolts, securing the security plate to the top of the
chassis to the top of the wall bracket.
4.
Using the 5 mm Hex tamperproof bit, remove the three bolts securing the security
plate to the top of the chassis. Remove the security plate and store for future use.
WARNING
An M-Cellcity can weigh up to 30 kg and the M-Cellcity+ up to 32 kg, handle
with extreme care.
5.
Locate, and fit, the previously stored carrying/lifting handle to the top of the
chassis, using the three M8 bolts removed in step 4.
6.
Using the carrying/lifting handle and supporting the weight of the chassis, lift and
pull away from the wall bracket.
M-Cellcity
enclosure
replacement
To replace an M-Cellcity enclosure, refer to the installation procedures detailed in
Category 423, Chapter 2 of this manual (which provides details of equipment delivery
and packing, unpacking, installation, battery installation, external cables, HDSL links and
installing the solar cover).
410

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
Replacing the battery

Removal
procedure
To remove the battery:
1.
If...
Then...
Use steps 1, 2, 5 to 7.
Use steps 1 to 7.
Remove the 11 M4 bolts (M-Cellcity) or 12 M4 (M-Cellcity+) retaining the chassis

bottom cover.
NOTE
The additional M4 bolt in the M-Cellcity+ is not in view and has to be reached
by a long screwdriver.
15th May 98
2.
Carefully remove the chassis bottom cover.
3.
Loosen the four M4 x 8 screws on the duplexer bracket assembly.
4.
Push the duplexer backwards away from the front fixing positions and pull forwards
in order to create sufficient space for releasing the battery connector.
5.
Disconnect battery flying lead from the chassis connector.
6.
Release and turn the battery retaining bar through 90 and remove battery.
7.
Remove the fuse from the old used battery.

68P02901W99-A
411
GSM-201-523
Replacement
procedure
To replace the battery:
NOTE
Only a fully charged battery should be plugged into an operational system.
Ensure that a serviceable fuse is fitted to the replacement battery, before fitment in the
chassis.
If...
Then...
Use steps 1, 3, 5 and 6.
Use steps 1 to 6.
1.
Position the replacement battery in the chassis battery chamber, place retaining
bar diagonally across battery and push battery deeper into chamber. When the
retaining bar is below the fixing locations within the chamber, rotate it to secure the
battery.
2.
Position the battery cable and connector over the bracket edge, then position
battery cable in the the recess of the duplexer bracket.
3.
Connect battery flying lead to the chassis connector.
4.
Replace duplexer over the two front fixing positions in the duplexer bracket
assembly and tighten the four M4 x 8 screws to secure the duplexer.
5.
Carefully fit the chassis bottom cover.
6.
Fit, and tighten, the 11 M4 bolts (M-Cellcity) or 12 M4 (M-Cellcity+) retaining the

chassis bottom cover.
NOTE
The additional M4 bolt in the M-Cellcity+ is not in view and has to be secured
by using a long screwdriver.
412

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-523
BATTERY
BATTERY CONNECTOR
E1/T1 LINKS
BATTERY CONNECTOR
BATTERY
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKET EARTH STUD
AC INPUT CONNECTOR
(UNDER DUPLEXER)

ANTENNA CONNECTOR
(UNDER DUPLEXER)
DUPLEXER BRACKET


15th May 98

68P02901W99-A
413
414
GSM-201-523

68P02901W99-A
15th May 98
CHAPTER 1
OPTIONS AND SPARES
CHAPTER 1
OPTIONS AND SPARES
Category 623
Parts Information
15th May 98
Parts Information: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

68P02901W96-O
GSM-201-623
ii

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
GSM-201-623
Category 623
Parts Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
13
14
15th May 98

68P02901W96-O
iii
GSM-201-623
iv

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
Chapter 1
Options and spares
15th May 98

68P02901W96-O
GSM-201-623
ii

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
GSM-201-623
Chapter 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
13
14
15th May 98

68P02901W96-O
iii
GSM-201-623
iv

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ options and spares
GSM-201-623

Introduction
The range of options and spares are shown as:
S
Factory fitted options.
Field fitted options.
Spares.
Factory fitted
options
The following diagram shows the range of factory fitted options. Table 1-1 lists the order
and part numbers.
M-Cellcity
INTERNAL ANTENNA
T43 OR BIB
M-Cellcity+
NIU-m
HIM-75 OR HIM-120
NIU-HDSL-m
HDSL MODULES
15th May 98

68P02901W96-O
11
GSM-201-623
Table 1-1 Factory fitted options (M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+)

Object
12
Qty
Order number
Part number
M-Cellcity 900 MHz option
SWUF2443
SW1039A
M-Cellcity 1800 MHz option
SWUG2443
SW1040A
M-Cellcity+ 900 MHz option
SWUF1059
SW1059A
M-Cellcity+ 1800 MHz option
SWUG1060
SW1060A
E1 - 75 ohm line interface

(T43)
SWLN2430
FACTORY
FITTED PARTS

(BIB)
SWLN2431
FACTORY
FITTED PARTS
T1 - 120 ohm line interface

(BIB)
SWLN2432
FACTORY
FITTED PARTS

(for HDSL)
SWLN5525
FACTORY
FITTED PARTS

(for HDSL)
SWLN5526
FACTORY
FITTED PARTS
GSM900 internal antenna

M-Cellcity only
SWAF4843
8504808N01
DCS1800 internal antenna

M-Cellcity only
SWAG4844
8504808N02
Battery backup
SWNN4842
6004774N01
PCMCIA memory card
SWLN4839
5168549A01

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
GSM-201-623
Field fitted
options
The following diagram shows the range of field fitted options. Table 1-2 lists the order and
part numbers.
M-Cellcity
M-Cellcity+
BATTERY UNIT
Table 1-2 Field fitted options

Object
15th May 98
Qty
Order number
Part number
Battery unit
SWNN4842
6004774N01
MCU TTY lead (test lead)
SWLN5167
3086245E01
Pole mounting fixing kit
SWLN4846
N/A
Pole mounting banding tool
SWLN4847
6604809N01
HDSL modem and hardware

(BSC end)
SWLN5528
N/A

68P02901W96-O
13
GSM-201-623
Spares
The following diagram shows the range of spares. Table 1-3 lists the order and part
numbers.
M-Cell city SOLAR COVER
M-Cell city +SOLAR COVER
M-Cell city + BOTTOM COVER
Table 1-3 Spares

Object
Qty
Order number
Part number
Battery unit
SWNN4842
6004774N01
Solar cover (M-Cellcity+ and

M-Cellcity)
SWLN5794
0186254M01
Wall bracket (M-Cellcity)
SWLN2490
0704689N01
Wall bracket (M-Cellcity+)
SWLN5796
0786358M01
Bottom cover
SWLN5988
1586292M01
NOTE
When a replacement solar cover is ordered, only the M-Cellcity+ cover style
will be despatched. This cover is suitable for the M-Cellcity enclosure.
14

68P02901W96-O
15th May 98
Index
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
GSM-201-020
ii

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
C
Commissioning
Checks, powerup: 423, 37
Overview: 423, 31
D
dcdc PSM
Alarms, warnings and shutdown: 323, 48
Functional description: 323, 45
Memory system: 323, 410
DCS1800, frequency band: 323, 112
decommissioning
PCU: 423, 42
PCU enclosure, checklist: 423, 46, 47
prerequisite: 423, 41
Digital module
MCUm: 323, 32
NIUm/NIUHDSLm: 323, 311
Digital modules, Overview: 323, 31
E
EGSM900, frequency band: 323, 112
Enclosure, Safety labels: 323, 18
F
Fault diagnosis, Overview: 523, 31
frequency, bands
DCS1800: 323, 112
EGSM900: 323, 112
GSM900: 323, 112
G
General information
Equipment access: 523, 12
Overview: 523, 11
Test equipment: 523, 18
Tools and materials: 523, 13
GSM900, frequency band: 323, 112
H
Heat management
Airflow: 323, 54
Enclosure cooling: 323, 53
Overview: 323, 51
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A
iii
GSM-201-020
I
Installation
Antenna, connecting: 423, 216
Battery, installation: 423, 213
chassis, installing: 423, 29
Chassis, unpacking: 423, 27
Delivery, equipment: 423, 24
E1/T1 cables, connecting: 423, 216
Earth cables, connecting: 423, 216
HDSL links, installation: 423, 223
Notes: 423, 230
Overview: 423, 21
Packaging: 423, 24
Power, connection: 423, 216
Solar cover, installing: 423, 227
M
MCellcity
commissioning, checks, prepowerup: 423, 35
test equipment, hardware integration: 423, 32
Main control unit, micro (MCUm): 323, 32
Maintenance, routine
Annual: 523, 26
Overview: 523, 21
Solar cover, removal: 523, 22
N
Network interface unit high rate digital subscriber line, micro (NIUHDSLm): 323, 311
Network interface unit, micro (NIUm): 323, 311
O
Options
factory fitted: 623, 11
field fitted: 623, 13
P
PCU, decommissioning: 423, 42
acdc PSM: 323, 44
dcdc PSM: 323, 45
Overview: 323, 43
Power supply system
Battery backup: 323, 411
Overview: 323, 41
R
Repair
Battery replacement: 523, 411
MCellcity enclosure, removal: 523, 44
MCellcity solar cover, removal: 523, 42
Overview: 523, 41
iv

68P02901W95-A
15th May 98
GSM-201-020
requirements: 523, 11
RF modules
Combiner: 323, 210
Duplexer: 323, 210
Overview: 323, 21
TCUm: 323, 23
Site preparation
Antenna cable, installation: 423, 137
Cable installation, power and earth: 423, 130
Cabling, power and earth: 423, 129
Delivery, equipment: 423, 115
Earthing, site: 423, 113
External antenna configurations: 423, 139
Guidelines for mounting: 423, 118
Installation kit: 423, 115
Installation kit, unpacking: 423, 117
Link cabling, E1/T1/HDSL: 423, 141
Links, E1/T1/HDSL: 423, 140
Notes: 423, 144
Overview: 423, 11
Preparation: 423, 112
Protection, transient: 423, 113
Requirements and considerations: 423, 16
Site earthing: 423, 114
Site visiting: 423, 19
Tool kits, field installation: 423, 12
Wall bracket, mounting: 423, 120
Spares: 623, 14
Specifications: 323, 110

TCUm
ORAC module: 323, 24
TRX module: 323, 27
15th May 98

68P02901W95-A

68P02901W95

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

68P02901W95

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For:rrobot

Printed on:Thu, Mar 16, 2000 05:12:35

Cellular Infrastructure Group

E Motorola 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

and MOTOROLA are trademarks of Motorola Inc.

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enclosure safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Duplexer and Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main control unit, micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network interface units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

HDSL module (M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation kit delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting the wall bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing antenna cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Antenna configurations (M-Cellcity+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing E1/T1/HDSL link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the chassis equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Installing the M-Cellcity chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting external cables to the M-Cellcity enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing HDSL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test equipment and test leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powering-up the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Decommissioning a M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test equipment and leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annual routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Overview of fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing an M-Cellcity solar cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing an M-Cellcity enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ options and spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Issue status of this manual

Issue status of this manual